JP6436868B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win a game based on the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and the symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner so that the symbols are stopped and displayed according to the lottery result. There is known a gaming machine that generates a big hit gaming state by stopping and displaying a big hit symbol on a display device when the result is a big hit. In this jackpot game state, a large winning opening as a winning opening that is normally closed is opened, and a lot of winning balls can be obtained in a short time by allowing the winning balls to win one after another. .

  In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, an upper plate in which a game medium for driving into the game region is stored below the game region in a front view, and a game medium that is disposed below the upper plate and overflows from the upper plate It is common to have a lower pan in which the water is stored (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-28390 A

  However, conventional gaming machines have a low appeal to the player.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a high appealing power to a player.

The present invention
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is played is formed ;
A body frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame provided on the body frame so as to be openable and closable;
An upper plate for storing game media for playing games in the game area;
An operation device that can be operated by a player;
A lower plate which has a lower plate body for storing game media and is provided on the door frame and into which game media can flow from a predetermined supply port ;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame, which bulges forward under the game area in a front view, accommodates the operation device therein, and forms an accommodation space so that a game medium does not flow from the lower plate. When,
With
The lower plate body includes a first lower plate portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion ,
A cover portion for covering the front SL above the second lower tray section,
The cover portion is provided integrally with the lower plate body regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame, and constitutes a part of a member forming the accommodation space,
The cover part is attached to a cover attaching part formed outside the game medium storage area in the lower plate ,
Before Symbol supply port, and which are located offset in the second lower tray portion than the center of the lateral width of the lower dish.
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is played is formed ;
A body frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame provided on the body frame so as to be openable and closable;
An upper plate for storing game media for playing games in the game area;
An effect device that produces a predetermined effect,
A lower plate which has a lower plate body for storing game media and is provided on the door frame and into which game media can flow from a predetermined supply port ;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame, which bulges forward under the game area in a front view, accommodates the effect device therein, and forms an accommodation space so that a game medium does not flow from the lower plate. When,
With
The lower plate body includes a first lower plate portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion ,
A cover portion for covering the front SL above the second lower tray section,
The cover portion is provided integrally with the lower plate body regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame, and constitutes a part of a member forming the accommodation space,
The cover part is attached to a cover attaching part formed outside the game medium storage area in the lower plate ,
Before Symbol supply port, and which are located offset in the second lower tray portion than the center of the lateral width of the lower dish.

Thus, according to the present invention, a gaming machine with high appealing power can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the front view of the handle unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit from the left front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from lower left back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the ball guide part in the lower plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the example provided with the ball guide part different from (a) in the lower plate. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the lower plate which can be divided | segmented, (b) is description which shows the state which expanded the storage area | region of the lower plate according to the magnitude | size of the space behind a production operation unit. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board | substrate unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . FIG. 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the embodiment of the effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line | wire in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit, and (b) was the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the main screen of the screen unit was turned forward, and (b) is the subscreen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) is an attempt to hide the second rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) In the state which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the subscreen turned to the front, it tried to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a dispensing device, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel the opaque state. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 114 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of the state of FIG. 114 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the RR line | wire in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the SS line | wire in FIG. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front unit in the game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area | region. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel the transparent state. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit in the front unit of a game board, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the back. It is explanatory drawing which cut | disconnected the attacker unit in a front unit at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area | region, and showed from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center combination in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center combination from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. (A) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in a back unit, (b) is the expanded sectional view cut | disconnected and expanded by the TT line | wire in (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top movable production | generation unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top movement production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top movable production | generation knit mainly for every structural unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper movable production | generation unit for every main structural unit, and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 1st decoration body unit in the back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 1st decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper 1st decoration body unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper 1st decoration body unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from a front the drive system when a back top 1st decoration body unit is a closed position, (b) is a drive system when a back top 1st decoration body unit is an open position from the front It is explanatory drawing shown. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd decoration body unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd decoration body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top 2 decoration body unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper 2nd decorative body unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the drive system when a back top 2 decorative body unit is a closed position, (b) is a drive system from the front when a back top 2 decorative body unit is an open position. It is explanatory drawing shown. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 3rd decorative body unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top 3rd decorative body unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top 3rd decoration body unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top 3rd decoration body unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from a front the drive system when a back top 3rd decoration body unit is a closed position, (b) is a drive system from the front when a back top 3rd decoration body unit is an open position. It is explanatory drawing shown. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back top rotation base unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back top rotation base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper rotation base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper rotation base unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear structure in a back upper rotation base unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the action | operation lever in a back top rotation base unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of an action lever from a front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear lifting unit as seen from the front after disassembling it into a movable unit and a fixed unit, and (b) is an exploded view of the rear lifting unit into a movable unit and a fixed unit. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable side unit of the back raising / lowering unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable side unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit, and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the drive system when the movable side unit of back raising / lowering unit is a raise position, (b) is the drive system when the movable side unit of back raising / lowering unit is a lowered position. It is explanatory drawing shown from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back upper raising / lowering unit is a raise position in a back upper movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back upper raising / lowering unit is a lowered position in a back upper movable production | presentation unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the operating lever is in the operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back-up rotating base unit is in the horizontal position in the back movable effect unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the back movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back top rotation base unit when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back top rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back surface rotation base unit when a movable side unit in a back surface movable production | presentation unit rotates 45 degree | times clockwise from a horizontal position, when a movable side unit is a lowered position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back top rotation base unit when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back top rotation base unit is a vertical position in a back top movable production | presentation unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the action lever has controlled rotation in the action position, when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the action movement unit on the back. When the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back top rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the back top movable effect unit, the back lever first decorative body unit, back top second decorative body unit, and back top first It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which is acting on the three decoration body units. (A) is a front view of the backside movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the backside moveable effect unit, and (c) is a backside movable decorative body unit in the backside movable effect unit. It is a rear view shown in the raised state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back center left decorative body and the back center right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position on the center side. With the back left decorative body and back right decorative body of the back left movable production unit and back right movable production unit in the back unit moved to the appearance position closer to the center, with each first decorative surface facing forward It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board showing the left movable decoration unit and the right and left movable production units in the state shown in FIG. . FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board showing the third movable surface facing forward by rotating the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit from the state of FIG. 171. . The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first decorative body unit on the back, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the second decorative body unit on the back, After the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are in the closed position, the first decorative body unit on the back and the second decorative on the back It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back upper rotating base unit is moved to the lowered position while being in the horizontal position so that the body unit and the third decorative body unit on the back are horizontally arranged. From the state of FIG. 174, the back upper rotating base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back first decorative body unit, the back second decorative body unit, and the back third decorative body unit are inclined. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where it was located in a line. From the state of FIG. 175, the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated by 45 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back top first decorative body unit, the back top second decorative body unit, and the back top third It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where decorative body units are arranged vertically. From the state of FIG. 176, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit, and The first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens in the open position of the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back third decorative body unit, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which enabled visual recognition. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back bottom movable decorative body unit of the back bottom movable effect unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascent position. 178 is a front view of the gaming board shown in a state where the lower back movable decorative body unit is further raised from the state of FIG. 178 and moved to the second raised position. FIG. Explanatory drawing which shows the example provided with LED for light-decorating the back front lower center lens of the stage of a center accessory and the back front decoration unit as another embodiment of a game board on the back movable production | presentation unit of a back unit It is. In the back movable movable unit in the back unit of the game board, the back rotating base unit is in a vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back third decorative body unit are in the open position, respectively. FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state where each of the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens is visible. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 183 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 182. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 183 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 182. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for jackpot types. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd receiving port opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the closed state of a 2nd receiving port, (B) is a figure which shows the open state of a 2nd receiving port. (A) is an execution table in the big hit gaming state A, (B) is an execution table in the big hit gaming state B, and (C) is an execution table in the big hit gaming state C. (A) is a timing chart executed according to the execution table in the jackpot gaming state A, (B) is a timing chart executed in accordance with the execution table in the jackpot gaming state B, (C) is a jackpot It is a timing chart performed according to the execution table at the time of gaming state C. It is an example of a concrete effect at the time of execution of jackpot game state A, jackpot game state B, and jackpot game state C in the effect display device. It is an example of a concrete effect at the time of execution of jackpot game state A, jackpot game state B, and jackpot game state C in the effect display device. It is an example of a concrete effect at the time of execution of jackpot game state A, jackpot game state B, and jackpot game state C in the effect display device.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and forward through the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes left and right upper reinforcing metal plates 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and left and right middle reinforcing members attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending up and down attached along the front left side of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcing up and down attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of projecting pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame , And a lock spring 144 that biases the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, so that the gravity center position of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as seen from the back. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 one by one to the ball launching device 680, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 that has an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 251a and that is open at the rear, and a box that closes the rear end of the front cover 251 and is opened at the front , A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition portion 253 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The ball punching member 253 having a ball and the game balls on the partitioning portion 253a of the ball punching member 253 are sent one by one to the hitting ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252 and vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feeding member 254 supported so as to be rotatable around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in front view, and a ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b when viewed from the front, and this slit 251c. An operating rod 253c of a ball punching member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. The front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is located upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball removal guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. The part opened to the rear on the end side is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removal member 253 includes a partition portion 253a that is divided below the entrance port 251a and between the entrance port 251a and the ball exit port 251b and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254, and a ball of the partition portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 253b, and a side below the actuation collar 253c from the side surface of the pivot collar 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side of the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253 c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327 a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253. A sphere holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rotation axis to the rotation shaft core side, and a rod-like flange portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b is in the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680 and enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking unit 254a blocks the movement toward the ball holding unit 254b (hit ball supply port 252a) and stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 250 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 256 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 256 swinging vertically. And a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that moves up and down and extends in the left-right direction, and the side that engages the ball feed actuating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b, A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the member 254 is provided.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that is swung by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 so that the ball feed member 254 is moved. It can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state located. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 is rotated to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254 is activated. Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682 by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951.

  Further, the ball removing member 253 pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 250 is applied with a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 253d, but protrudes forward. Since the rotation of the actuating rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320, the ball removal member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  When the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a, and the operation transmission unit 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320 and discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 327b formed with the action transmitting portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 contacts is urged upward by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c. Even if game balls are supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A tamper-proof member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so as to be detachable from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece 261 that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 262, and inclined portions 263 that are each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 facing each other. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260. Thereby, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act is performed in which an illegal game ball is taken in and out of the first starting port 2002 by operating a string, the illegal game ball launched (hit) by the ball launcher 680 is illegal. After a string attached to a simple game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shaped narrow formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is narrowed. It can be cut by the part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full sphere receiving port 274 that opens toward the rear at the lower right side of the front sphere passage 273 and the through-sphere passage 273 and communicates with the full guide passage 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 274 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball opened to the front near the lower right corner of the front view and received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are moved forward. And a ball discharge port 276 that communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide area, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 that biases the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the dish unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and can be urged to eliminate the filling of the lower plate 322.

  The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream end (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the game ball in the upper plate 321. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 attached rotatably to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatable attachment by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 on the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, and a handle base 301 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 in front view. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304 A single button 311 that is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the case 301, and a single button operation sensor 312 that is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. Yes.

  A handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 includes a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a hollow from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from an inner position with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. A locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front portion of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 302a that protrudes most clockwise by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Slightly low. The second protrusion 302b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 302b bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the counter-tick that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 302c is inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and more gently than the side face in the counterclockwise direction where the side face in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 away from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that have a round front center and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 through the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the attachment boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the attachment boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is positioned rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The driving of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be shot. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 by some method without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. I can't do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the single button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single button 311, and the firing control unit (illustrated) of the payout control board 951 is shown. Is omitted), the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the playing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and to release the single button 311 before operating the single button 311 by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a with strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is most rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball is driven most strongly into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated is the fourth protrusion 302d. Therefore, by changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the “right-handed” position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce a person's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

[3-3. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit disassembled for each main member and is seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

  The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored.

  The dish unit 320 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 323, and the left side of the dish unit base bulges forward greatly from the left and right center. An upper plate body 324 that forms an upper plate 321, and a lower plate body 325 that is attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward to form a lower plate 322. And a dish unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 includes an upper dish ball removal button 327 that is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so that it can be pressed from above on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front, and a front view of the upper dish ball removal button 327. A ball rental button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball rental button 328, and a ball rental button 328 The ball rental return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329 and the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper dish 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and projecting forward from the front of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Top plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is opened upward. Has been. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 321 moves from the most bulged part to the right in the front view, the front end retreats backward, and a guide passage part 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. Yes. The entire upper surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which a later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to contact the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), so that the game ball Charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower dish 322 is disposed below the upper dish 321 and on the left side of the center of the dish unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 322 is formed in a container shape that can store a game ball, and is attached to the tray tray cover 326 and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a up and down to allow the game ball to be discharged. And an escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the rendered production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open of the lower plate main body 325. A dish unit base 323 that is closed at the rear, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of the portion of the lower dish body 325 that projects into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view extends to the left and right, and a trapezoid in which the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. Are curved so that the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending obliquely are recessed backward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases in the plan view from the front to the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 and the like, the lower dish main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral end excluding a rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle and the upper side shorter than the bottom side are arranged on the front side and the left and right sides extending obliquely are recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall 325b rises upward from the bottom wall 325a at a height that is two to five times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower dish main body 325, the curved portion at the front right front corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the upper right half of the lower plate body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover upright wall portion 340a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower platen main body 325, and an approximately upper end of the cover upright wall portion 340a. A ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion from a part of the front side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling part 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower dish cover part 326k of the dish unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the escape portion 322b. Yes.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (the production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end of the front end side of the front end side that extends short to the left and right, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in the front view. Located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half wraps around the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326, which will be described later, and a lower plate. Lower pan second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower tray cover 340). Area). In other words, the lower dish 322 is more than half of the storage area in which the game ball can be stored (the area corresponding to the storage area in plan view and the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2). It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the dotted hatch area is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326 j in the dish unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c that forms the rear wall is open to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It arrange | positions at the lower plate | pan 2nd area | region A2 used as the back of the side. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower tray ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to bend toward the rear of the production operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) bulging forward. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower dish 322 is formed so that the lower dish second area A2 is larger than the lower dish first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower dish 322 includes a lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower dish 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lid member 334 that is operated by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the normal state, the lower dish 322 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322 a closed by a lid member 334, so that a game ball can be stored in the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is disposed in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 that forms the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a front side of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed, and the bottom surface has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward Therefore, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball hole 322a is opened are directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Immediately it is discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the lower end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball supply hole 322a is opened in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the left side region of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball discharge hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. A ball | bowl will contact | abut to the site | part which forms the standing wall of the right side of the lower plate 322 in the main body standing wall part 325b. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball hole 322a without going to the region on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is formed. In a state in which is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately inserted into the region on the left side of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is kept open, the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, so that they are paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box can be made to make it difficult for the game balls to feel annoying through the lower plate 322, thereby allowing the player to play a game (game ball driving operation). And a production image, etc.), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b. Even if the game ball supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 jumps and jumps up, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 It is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Accordingly, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are brought into contact with or pressed against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower dish 322 is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the lower dish ball supply hole 323c is discharged. Since the played game ball can be directly entered into the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish body 325. Can do. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325 is inclined. It will climb the bottom, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c into the lower tray 322 abut against the lower tray covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced and damaged. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are separated, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Moreover, although the cover standing wall part 340a of the lower dish cover 340 has shown the example which stood up from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325, the bottom wall part 325a of the lower dish main body 325 showed the bottom plate cover 340's The cover standing wall 340a may rise. Moreover, although the ceiling part 340b of the lower tray cover 340 showed the example extended substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall part 340a, the ceiling part 340b of the lower dish cover 340 is shown in the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example provided with the escape part 322b for avoiding the contact with the production operation unit 400 (2nd production operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 was shown, the escape part 322b is not provided. A lower plate 322 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform surface shape without a through-hole, but a plurality of through holes through which game balls cannot pass are shown. It may have a perforated hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It is good also as what was formed in the thing and net shape. It should be noted that a light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) so that the interior of the lower dish 322 is illuminated (light-emitting decorated) through a fence-like or net-like gap of the lower dish 322. .

  In this embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by combining these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. What is integrated, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 In which the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit. That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
With reference to FIG. 46, an embodiment in which the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail. . FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  The example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. A pair of sphere guiding portions 322c are provided that are separated from each other by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) that extends back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Accordingly, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are guided to the lower dish ball extraction holes 322a by the pair of ball guide parts 322c without getting over the ball guide parts 322c, and the lower dish balls It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower plate 322 in this example is similar to the above in that the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball are located on the rear side (lower plate second region A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the left side area of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance that passes through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of the game ball, a production image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guide portion 322c is rail-shaped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Any material that can be guided to the dishball hole 322a may be used.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball released diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. In addition to being formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, a buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate ball hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball released to the right front from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is reflected toward the lower dish ball hole 322a by the buffer 322d and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and reflects, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above (the production operation unit 400 that is the lower plate second area A2 and the production operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are disposed behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 so that they cannot be seen from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d can be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Accordingly, when game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the bag is also discharged directly to the dollar box. By making it difficult to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, production image, etc.) and suppress the decrease in interest Can be made.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), a portion on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball that has jumped upward from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material which forms the lower plate 322, and may use the buffer material which relieves the collision sound at the time of reflection, such as rubber | gum and a foam. Moreover, the return part 322e is good also as what does not comprise the side wall of the lower plate 322, and may comprise a part of side wall (main body standing wall part 325b) of the lower plate 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rear side of the covering wall on the front end side of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit mounting part 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game balls flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a jump over the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a side to And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing shown, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In addition, the area | region shown with a dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 has shown the remaining space of the attachment space 326j.

  First, the lower dish main body 325 (lower dish 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, and has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a. A main body part 325A and a first extension part 325B that is attached to the right side of the main body part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B further includes the remaining space (the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A) of the installation space 326j in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is accommodated, as compared with the main body unit 325A. Projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension part 325B is formed with an escape part 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A at the right front corner.

  Next, in the example of FIGS. 47B and 47C, the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than that of the example of FIG. The space behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a main body portion 325A that constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension part 325C has a constant lateral width from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension part 325B. Further, the lower plate 322 is attached with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communication), and the storage area of the game balls Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C in the lower platen main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be divided, and at least one of the divided members can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as necessary. Further, since the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes behind (in the installation space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower dish second area A2 behind the effect operating unit 400 (second effect operating unit 400A). You may arrange | position on the boundary line of dish 1st area | region A1 and lower dish 2nd area | region A2, and may arrange | position in lower dish 1st area | region A1.

  In the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball punching hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are provided. You may make it provide the lower dish ball | bowl hole 322a.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower dish main body 325. However, the game ball is placed on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the lower plate body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided in the same manner as the lower plate body 325, or can be divided into the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth at the lower side of the upper dish ball supply port 323a and the upper dish ball supply port 323a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating back and forth in the lower left portion from the left and right center in front view and extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear, The upper plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d that penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  In addition, the tray unit base 323 has a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the tray unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the right side surface of the lower dish ball supply port 323c when viewed from the front, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the released game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the front view of the ball feed guide path 323e, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball removal guide path 323f An operation transmitting portion 327a that is penetrating back and forth at a height between the two and is in contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and operated by the upper dish ball removing button 327 protrudes so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opened in a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit base 323 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 321, and the cylindrical rear end is the upper tray passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through-ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game ball paid out from the payout unit 800 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens in the rear wall of the lower plate 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower tray passage port 116 from the front side of the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 is connected. Thereby, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower tray ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) of the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, and the like. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens largely forward in the center in the left-right direction and to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached, and on both left and right sides of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. A dish front upper decoration part 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper dish 321 and a dish front lower decoration part 326c formed on the lower side of the left and right dish front decoration part 326b are provided. Yes.

  The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed with a size of about 1/3 in the horizontal direction with respect to the full width in the horizontal direction of the dish unit 320, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320. It is formed at a height. In addition, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move backward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front front decoration part 326b moves rearward as it goes from the horizontal direction center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward both left and right sides. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions. The upper front decorative portion 326b is inclined so that the lower end moves upward from the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a side) toward the left and right ends. In the dish unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front dish portion 326b on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The front front side of the dish front decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center side of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the both left and right sides. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the intermediate portion is recessed backward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions.

  A lower dish opening 326d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the front lower dish portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower dish 322 faces forward from the lower dish opening 326d. In the lower front dish portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, a lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower dish opening 326d in the front lower dish part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state where it is assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The front lower dish portion 326c on the right side when viewed from the front has a handle insertion port 326f that passes through the front and rear at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g that penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f in the vicinity of the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted is formed.

  The dish unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate part 326h extending from the upper end of the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the right side when viewed from the front to the front end of the dish unit base 323, and the top plate part 326h allows Covers the upper right side. The top plate ball removal button 327, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate part 326 i that extends from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative part 326 c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from below to above, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a hole penetrating in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the site of the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). In addition, the dish unit cover 326 includes a lower dish cover part 326k that extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d and covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover part 326k comes into contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall 325b in the lower plate body 325 at the left end, and the left end of the ceiling part 340b in the lower plate cover 340 comes into contact with the right end. Yes.

[3-3e. Top plate ball removal button]
The upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper dish ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front, and the game ball in the upper dish 321 is moved to the lower dish 322 by pressing. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear edge side is left and right below the top plate part 326h by a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate part 326h of the dish unit cover 326. It is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the direction. The upper end of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removal lever that extends vertically. The ball removal lever is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball removal button 327.

  The ball removal lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball removal button 327 comes into contact with the upper part of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slidably mounted by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b includes an operation transmission part 327a that protrudes rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission part 327a is connected to the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It protrudes rearward so as to face, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b is biased upward by an upper dish ball removal spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c causes the upper dish ball removal slider 327b and the ball removal lever to be biased. An upper pan ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission part 327a of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission part 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320, and discharged to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  When the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoying through the lower plate 322. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of game balls, effect images, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are, as shown in the drawing, on the right side of the top dish ball removal button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 in the circular decoration. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 is used to insert a predetermined number of game balls into the ball lending machine (not shown) placed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 by inserting a cash or prepaid card and pressing it. The unit 320 is lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 321. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state where the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after subtracting the rented game balls.

  Although not shown, the ball rental return display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED disposed below the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or An error code or the like when the ball lending machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end of the dish unit cover 326 near the effect operation unit attachment part 326a in the front dish upper decoration part 326b on the left side when viewed from the front. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex pointing leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and a desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Lower pan ball release button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the front dish lower decorative part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be discharged below the tray unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower dish ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is disposed on the left side with respect to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate so that the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 is accommodated in a stepped portion that is recessed from below to above at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower dish ball removal base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a penetrating vertically in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 322a at a position directly below the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322. . Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is disposed between the lower dish body 325 and the lower dish ball removal base 335. Accordingly, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position on the left side of the lower dish ball removal button 333 in plan view. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322 a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower dish ball removal base 335. As a result, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates about the vertically extending axis, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown, the lower dish ball removal base 335 includes a holding device that holds the lower dish ball removal button 333 when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower dish ball removal button. A lower dish ball spring for biasing 333 forward is attached. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is moved to move, and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains in the rearward movement state. In this state, even if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is maintained open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward while the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower dish ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, a game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box disposed below the plate unit 320, the dollar box can be operated via the lower plate 322 only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327. Can be discharged, and the labor involved in ball removal can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48A, and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also provide a production image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted thereon can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation buttons 410 are attached so as to be able to advance and retreat.

  The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has four through holes 431a penetrating in a substantially square shape extending vertically in the center portion, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through hole 431a. A ring-shaped unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button decorative member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through-hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431, and which extends in a short tube shape in the front-rear direction; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, respectively. The operations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Each of the three press detection sensors 440 that are attached to the 439 and detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth in the center, and is formed with a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right outside the through hole 431a. These holding holes 431b are formed so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. Thus, it is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. In addition, the upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  Further, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from between a portion to which the operation button upper inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper front portion. It has. The light shielding wall 431c allows the frame top lens 418 to be decorated with light emission only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a that extends short in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that passes through the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that are attached to the unit base 431.

  The peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating through the front plate portion 432b is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and includes a plurality of first button inner decorative portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an odd octagonal shape centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b A plurality of second button interior decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button inner decorative member 432 is not clearly visible behind the lens due to the lens effect of the first button inner decorative portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are each mounted with a plurality of LEDs. By making it emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432 with light emission, the inside of the operation button 410 or the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be light emission decorated.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are respectively full color LEDs. It is said that. The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 have a white front surface. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the production operation unit 400. It abuts on the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Specifically, three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three press detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three press detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, operation button lower inner decoration board 436, frame top lens decoration board 437, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 and the door frame base unit 100 for relaying the connection to the door body relay board. Is.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear portion of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a bottom surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and a bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck downward, until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the frame unit 415 The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 being bent downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the center portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 has an outer periphery formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape comes into contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431 a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button interior decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and faces forward from an opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  Door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from peripheral control board 1510 in liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a production | presentation operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by the game ball being shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can perform the operation. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 is formed so that its full width is slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, the production operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who presses the operation button 410 can be prevented. Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the effect operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave and convex lines of the second button decorative portion 432g intersect as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are formed of a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-4g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, the second rendering operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the rendering operation unit 400, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit that is different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second rendering operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The second base unit 450 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The second base unit 450 is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second production table that can be installed and can display production images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, In addition, the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 are different from the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. And a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern in which a plurality of rows of triangles and a triangle having one apex toward the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference. A right triangle pattern comprising a bottom side facing the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base side And a hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, a side extending from the center of the truss-like triangle base to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle pattern, and a tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in the polyhedron shape. Thereby, since the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so the first button decoration portion 411a. In this part, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner, and the light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Accordingly, at the site of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear opened. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the second presentation operation unit 400A has the same configuration as that of the decoration board unit 420 of the presentation operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is what

  The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451. The second base unit 450 is rearward in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Column-shaped button shafts 452 that are slidably inserted from each other, and the operation button springs through which the four button shafts 452 are inserted and the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410 are urged forward. (Not shown) and three press detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation buttons 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b that protrudes hemispherically from the inner periphery of the main body 451a to the rear, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that passes through the cover portion 451b in the front-rear direction with a substantially quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface of the main body portion 451a to the rear, and a main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxially with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. The lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed (U-shaped) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery that are substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed to have a size that can be accommodated without contacting when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. Yes. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the upper, lower, left and right corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. These holding holes 451d are formed so that the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In these four holding holes 451d, a button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached to be slidable in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can do.

  Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper left holding hole 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper right holding hole 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451d, and the front end of these operation button springs comes into contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, whereby the operation button springs are operated via the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open frontward and extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc shape are coaxially located. The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f are inserted into the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the front, with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 inserted, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 has their respective front surfaces passing through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed as described above, and is separated in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle with the central axis as the center. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulates the rotation range of the screen unit 470 when the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Yes. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction portions 451g.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the magnet is each embed | buried in a pair of rotation control part 451g, and it contact | abuts to the rotation control part 451g by magnetizing with the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b. The stopper 475b is difficult to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Accordingly, the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the sub-screen 472 is directed forward with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to be rotated by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like is suppressed to the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, three pressing detection sensors 454 are left on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are respectively attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three press detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, and the second base unit 451A. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front portion of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and attached to the lower front portion of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  Further, the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A rotates the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover unit 451 b of the second base unit 450. The projector 500 that is disposed and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 that is open at the front, and is mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450. Upper cover 506 and upper part And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and an effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 that is milky white and translucent, and a disc shape with one end of the main screen 471 in the axial direction as a part of the outer periphery. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, milky white and translucent, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the working gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475a formed over substantially the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A transparent sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen A sub-screen decoration board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472 attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen 472 on the opposite side of the main screen 471 A semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length that is approximately 4/3 times the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are edged by the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decorative member 478.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and includes a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction, and an inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a is closed. A curved screen-like general portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape with a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the circumferential ends of the gear teeth 475a and the gear teeth 475a. And a detecting piece 475c protruding in a flat plate shape from the opposite side to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape with the shaft center of the upper shaft member 473 as the center in the assembled state in the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like that.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b in the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull with a transparent member, and the thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 is changed in a complicated manner. It has become difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the sub screen decoration member 476 in the shape of a skull.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light emission. More specifically, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits the LED 477a so that the “eye” portion of the skull and the “PUSH” character portion can be strongly illuminated.

  In addition, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472, and does not include a member that diffuses light between the sub-screen decoration 477 and the LED 477a. The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 on the sub-screen 472.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc as in the peripheral decorative portion 472a. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image that is projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of a semi-cylindrical shape and attracts attention from the player due to the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central sub-screen decoration member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 in the back center. The operation button 410 is pressed to the player by the lighting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to promote.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are configured to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are opened forward in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. Further, the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in the state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. Due to the concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape, the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 can be favorably rotated between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side, and is positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Thereby, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can drive the screen unit 470 to rotate. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 attached to the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  In the state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 so that the screen unit 470 extends forward and backward through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is disposed in a hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 through a projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a cylindrical shape and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Installed as follows.

  The projector 500 can project effect images over substantially the front surfaces of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display still images and moving images as effect images. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second rendering operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in front view.

[3-4g-5f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper part of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position and the second position where the sub screen 472 is in the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. Based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507, the rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and reduces the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, so that the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320 is provided. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that contacts the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg pieces that protrude downward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 512a when viewed from the front and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg piece portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  In this buffer unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510. Move downwards. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 further moves downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 contacts the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since the main body portion 512a has a gap formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-like main body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are absorbed. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effects of the second stage operation unit]
The operational effects of the second performance operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state which turned the screen ahead. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit with the main screen facing forward, as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button 410 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 and the player can be entertained, and the player can be operated by operating the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second rendering operation unit 400 </ b> A has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The second presentation operation unit 400 </ b> A has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. The second performance operation unit 400 </ b> A is attached to the dish unit 320 between the lower end of the leg piece part 512 b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate part 326 i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In addition, a gap is formed. That is, the second rendering operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part with respect to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is installed to become. Thereby, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as possible as the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 are slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be in the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring. The frame main body 416 is in contact with a portion in the vicinity of the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has a central side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the front from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, while the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight back. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. As a result, the entire second performance operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and vibrations can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second performance operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (near the upper part of the operation button 410), strong vibration is applied to the player who presses the button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512 a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326 i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the impact is caused in multiple stages by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an excessive force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second rendering operation unit 400A or the like is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is not performed. Since the button 410, the second performance operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress the lowering of the player's interest, and to make the damage difficult. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), compared to a flat plate shape. In addition to high strength and rigidity, even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness, such as 411a and the 2nd button decoration part 411b, can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (refer FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is the inside of the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combined with the triangle. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 of 460A is located, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470 This member can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 capable of being pressed is provided with the door frame side second effect display device 460A, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating. It is possible to prevent discomfort and to arrange the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the second effect display unit 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like that are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the top and bottom outside of the main screen 471, the left outside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right of the peripheral decorative member 478 The outer part (the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It is possible to hide, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the second performance operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

  In the state of the first position where the main screen 471 is facing forward, the general screen portion of the sub-screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. 472b and the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the main screen 471 being rotatable, etc., so that when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, A movement exceeding the player's expectation is performed in the button 410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the second position where the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are moved by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) can rotate, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. The player can be entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a center side from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display that is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a that is a combination of a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range and that is disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. The device 460A includes a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangle decoration (first button decoration part 411a) arranged on the front side and the square decoration arranged on the rear side (periphery decoration part 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) overlap so as to intersect. As a result, the player can show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration part 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. As the position moves, the overlapping state changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can be changed and the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the three-dimensional decoration with a depth can be displayed to the player. Can be shown to the player and entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward, or the sub screen. 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration composed of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction and extend vertically. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row vertically intersects the decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration part 472a is in an annularly extending state, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps the decoration made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. Accordingly, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the decoration change, The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and the player can be entertained to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen (a main screen 471 and a sub screen 472) that can be switched on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 that projects and displays the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device can be displayed, which has a strong impact on the player. You can entertain and entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a sub-screen 472 having a disc-shaped relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 in the center, and the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. A rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis is provided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the semi-cylindrical center axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and is translucent milky white. The effect image projected from the front side can be viewed through the main screen 471. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Accordingly, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It can be recognized that it is different from the above, and the player can be surprised, the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the entertainment image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disc-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 A sub-screen decoration member 476 that imitates a skull appears in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472. By the way, a flat and non-transparent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, so that the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. As a result, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected onto the center of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75B). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, if the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration board 477 is caused to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be illuminated and decorated by the light, and the sub-screen provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be decorated with light emission. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light, it is possible to make the shadow of the sub-screen decoration board 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light while the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, and produces an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, an effect image is displayed on a portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on a portion outside the sub-screen decoration member 476 made of a decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decoration member 476 that is the inside of the sub-screen is decorated with light emission by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decoration effect different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machine is given. The player can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. At the same time, the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-intensity effect image that cannot be achieved by a conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable can be displayed.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in a state where the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction to change from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. If the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating, the part located in the projection range of the projector 500 on the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. The effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect such that the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate on the effect image projected from the projector 500 is produced. The player can be shown and entertained.

  In this way, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Therefore, the player can show a decoration with movement and a three-dimensional feeling to the player, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front surface behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily decorated with the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  In addition, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is arranged on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame By emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. An effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and an effect that cannot be achieved by a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (changes) can be presented to the player. , You can entertain the player with a strong impact.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 78C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are provided from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square having a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. A lens portion 532b. The door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed in a saw-like shape in which the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a peak portion between the grooves is pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 532b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 81). As a result, the light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by light irradiated from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front of the circular decorative portion. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the center in the vertical direction at the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, The upper part of the unit-shaped decorative base 535 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper character-like part is connected to the upper end of the lower character-like part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 82C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 86A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 86B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82A. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat plate-like right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape in which the center portion in the front-rear direction is closed, extending in a rectangular tube shape short in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right direction center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 553a is moved to the right from the rear end side toward the front, as shown in FIG. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall 553b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 553e is within the main body portion 553a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward as viewed from the rear end side toward the front. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of notches 556 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552 c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes backward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit decorative member 561, respectively. Only the middle LED 552c can be decorated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By causing the member 561 and the like to be decorated with light emission in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of the malfunction to the staff of the game hall, and to respond quickly to the malfunction. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 574 has a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and is disposed on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 having translucency and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 are closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 574 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 574 The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are respectively mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plural (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 574 are penetrated. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 574. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the lower part in the vicinity of both left and right sides of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right sides, and about a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion projecting forward. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending leftward and rightward at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely from the portion protruding in a trapezoidal shape forward in the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 574 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  The unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out squarely from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut from the rear end in the left-right direction on the lower surface to the front. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light emission by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on the left and right outer sides of the front end of the portion protruding forward on the front surface of the unit main body 574. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front side of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that house the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left side. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. The portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 that is positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is connected to the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. The portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that the opened portion is closed by the unit main body 574. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side to the left of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. Thereby, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 are formed on the right side. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after the respective light guide members 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated satisfactorily.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curled backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through-hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower side of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to bend backward (the plate unit). 320, a shape curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, it can make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and appeal to the players strongly. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be secured in the lower plate 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by tactile sense that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball hole 322a opened in the lower plate 322 because the lower plate ball hole 322a is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (directly in front). Then, as soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first region A1, the lower side of the lower plate 322 is displayed without showing the player the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, A shape that is recessed so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Because it protrudes forward in the center in the left and right direction, it can show the player a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left and right direction is conspicuous, and by the decoration of sophisticated feeling The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the cage player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion port 605 that passes through the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and a door of the board unit 900 that passes through the front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and the lower side. A connecting opening 606 that faces the frame relay board 911 forward, and a circular shape that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side of the game board placement part 602 when viewed from the front, and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. A speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, so that the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment for attaching the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is provided. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attaching portion 610.

  The main body frame base 600 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to be pivotable to a position slightly lower on the left side from the center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 whose rear part is bent in an L shape upward, and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrates the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3. The door frame hinge hole 644 for supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend from the left end to the upper side and extend upward from the left end. A regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first body 641 and the lower hinge second body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the strength of the game ball is changed in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the game ball that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 270 to the foul ball receiving port 275, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and latchable with the outer frame 2, and projecting in a cylindrical shape forward from the lower portion of the unit base 701; A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door according to the rotation direction of the key. A key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame collar 702 or the outer frame collar 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Q-Q in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an illustration showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . Moreover, FIG. 112 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Normal guidance path 861 that guides the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, guides the game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e to the front of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged on the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a rear piece of the movable piece member that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 which is attached in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821e with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is opened at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member rear 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved to the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and rear directions by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a line. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated favorably by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member 825 or the movable piece member 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827. The Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to weight attachment portions 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member rear part 826 are moved according to their own weight and weight weight. The lower end side of 825a, 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening that is open at the front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open to allow the game ball to pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 having an end passing through the front box 831 and attached to the rear box 832, a shaft member 838 passing through the shaft member 838 and rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved back and forth between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and that has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the position closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere receiving portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. In addition, the payout blade 839 is disposed in a portion bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the payout passages 831d and 832d. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout vane 839 comes into contact with the outer peripheries of the front vane 839b and the rear vane 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the bent portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d in a crank shape. Cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the payout passages 831d and 832d, from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832 respectively, a projecting portion 843c projecting from the upper portion of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843a. A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 105) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. Touching. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, a game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b. However, it is located directly under the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball-out guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game ball stored on the upper side of the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full sphere path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game balls from the front end to the through-ball path 273 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and that can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located from below the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860 is a through ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding are not performed. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, thereby operating the door frame 3. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. The through-ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are penetrated from the side. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has more game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of game balls through the foul cover unit 270 to the lower plate 322 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321, the foul cover unit 270 is not able to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322. A game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storage of the game ball in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 with respect to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In such a state, it is possible to fill the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full sphere path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in conventional pachinko machines, so that in a gaming state in which many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are released by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is accommodated, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the dispensing of the game ball is accommodated. A payout control board box 950 .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front face of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. This door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 123. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in which the panel of the game panel is in an opaque state. 115 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the gaming board from the back. It is a perspective view. 118 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR in FIG. 114, and FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS in FIG. Further, FIG. 120 is a front view of the front unit of the game board cut at the approximate center in the front-rear direction within the game area. FIG. 121 is a front view of the game board in which the panel of the game panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled for each main structure.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 There are provided a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the out port 1126, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left side of the start port unit 2100 in front view. The side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality of (three here) general winning holes 2001, and the side slope attached to the upper left end of the side unit 2200 in front view. 2300 and a general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a first grand prize port, which are attached to the right side of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. 2005, an attacker unit 2400 having a second grand prize opening 2006, a start port unit 2100 and a side unit In above the bets 2200, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer in the game area 5a, a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the board side effect display device 1600, an effect drive board 3031 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view 3031, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 on the rear side of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010 And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view of 3031.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the left side and the lower side in front view, and a back attached to surround the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 respectively attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back movable movable effect unit 3500 attached and a back lower movable effect unit 3700 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of a front component member and a game panel in the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the back. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower end, a lower side of the out guiding part 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002, although not shown. These positioning protrusions can be inserted into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes composed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and vertically And a long hole extending. These fitting holes and long holes are arranged outside the game area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. Moreover, the panel board 1110 is provided with the step-shaped engagement step part which the front side became depressed in the both ends of an upper side, and the both ends of a lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions are cut out to substantially half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a in the same manner as the fitting holes and the long holes. Is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 1120.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion. And a through-hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. It becomes the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion has a front inner peripheral surface having a size that allows a predetermined amount of clearance to be formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the long hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion, and forward from the front of the holding step portion. It has a plurality of projecting pins that extend toward and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other by fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the long holes of the panel plate 1110.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes an engaging claw and an engaging piece that engage with the engaging step at a position corresponding to the engaging step of the panel plate 1110. Specifically, the engaging claw is disposed on the upper part of the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110, protrudes forward from the front surface of the holding step portion, It is adapted to be elastically engaged with the engaging step portion. The engaging claw has a size that does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engaging piece of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. This engagement piece is on the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece and the front surface of the holding step portion. A predetermined amount is extended. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws and engagement pieces.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) in the front component member 1000. The panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 by inserting the attachment bosses of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of attachment holes, and the panel holder 1120 ( The gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The insertion hole 1129 is inserted through the rear end of the function display unit 1400.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 118) for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the gate sensor 2401, the first start opening sensor 3112, the second start opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the first big prize opening sensor via the panel relay board 3032. 4005, second grand prize opening sensor 2402, first entrance sensor 2434, second entrance sensor 2435, general prize opening sensor 3111, gate sensor 2401, start opening solenoid 2107, first attacker solenoid 2108, second attacker solenoid 2109 Are connected to a sorting solenoid 2110.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 181). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold indicator 1408 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003, and a lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying one special lottery result, and a first special retention number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of game balls to the first starting port 2002 And a first 140 lottery that displays the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2004. A special symbol display 1405, a second special hold number display 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004, and a first special lottery result or a second special lottery When the result is “big hit” or the like, a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of rounds described later is mainly provided.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 117 and 123. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 118) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the presentation operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board side presentation display device 1600, the presentation drive board 3031, and the like.

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. 3010c, after inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 A first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged at the height between the general prize opening 2001 and the first start opening 2002 on the right side of the general prize opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged between the second start opening 2004 and the first big prize opening 2005.

  Further, the front unit 2000 includes a sub-out port 2007 for discharging the game ball from the game area 5a between the first grand prize port 2005 and the second grand prize port 2006.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the out port 1126, and includes a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left side of the start port unit 2100 in front view. A side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning holes 2001, a side slope 2300 that is attached above the left end of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front, and a start port unit An attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right side of the front view 2100 and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning port 2005, and a second major winning port 2006. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached to the approximate center in the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit, side unit, side slope, and attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the back. is there. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, at the top, the first starting port 2002 is always open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

  The start port unit 2100 is formed with a first start port 2002 and is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front and has a translucent unit main body 2101 and is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2101. And a starter decoration board 2102 (see FIG. 120) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The start port unit 2100 can illuminate the lower side of the first start port 2002 by causing the LED of the start port decoration board 2102 to emit light.

  When the start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward. The first start port 2002 will be described later. It is located immediately below the chance exit 2536 in the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Accordingly, when a game ball is released downward from the chance exit 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability. The starter unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the first starter port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfers it to the central transfer port 3135 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001 that are always open upward.

  The side unit 2200 is provided in a state in which three general winning ports 2001 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, and is provided so that the three general winning ports 2001 become higher toward the left in the front view.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the three general winning ports 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, below the first start port 2002, and start. It will be in the state arrange | positioned between the mouth unit 2100 and the side slope 2300. FIG. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfers it to the delivery port 3151 of the ball guiding unit 3150 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

[5-8c. Side slope]
Next, the side slope 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. In the game area 5a, the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front slightly upward from the center in the vertical direction at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that protrudes forward and extends to the left and right so that the right end side when viewed from the front is lowered.

  The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf 2301 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also on the left. Further, the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110, and the shelf 2301 is positioned above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, the side slope 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2301. There is a possibility that a game ball may be received in any of the three general winning ports 2001 of the start port 2002 and the side unit 2200.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the attacker unit in the front unit as cut from the front and rear in the front and rear direction in the game area. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001 out of four general winning ports 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first large winning port 2005, a second large winning port 2006, and a sub-out port 2007. It has.

  As shown in FIG. 126 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has a bottom shape that is inclined so that the right end is located slightly above the right side, a right side that rises substantially vertically from the right end of the bottom side, and an upper end of the right side. It is formed in a substantially triangular shape having an oblique side extending obliquely so as to connect the left end of the bottom side. In the attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls circulate (pass) vertically is disposed in the upper right corner, and a second start port 2004 that can be opened forward is disposed directly below the gate portion 2003. . In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second big prize opening 2006 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second start opening 2004, and is always open to the left at the lower left of the second big prize opening 2006. A sub-out port 2007 is arranged. Further, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first big prize opening 2005 that can be opened upward slightly to the left of the sub-out opening 2007, and always opens upward at the lower left of the first big prize opening 2005. The general winning opening 2001 is arranged.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball that passes through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004, and a first grand prize port 2005. A first big prize opening sensor 4005 for detecting an accepted game ball and a second big prize opening sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball received in the second big prize opening 2006 are provided.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening door 2411 that opens and closes the second start opening 2004 according to a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2003, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. The first grand prize opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second A second big prize opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2006 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball into the start opening 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a gate passage 2420 that extends vertically in the upper right corner in a front view and allows game balls to circulate; a left side passage 2421 that extends vertically on the left side of the gate passage 2420 and allows game balls to circulate; A right side passage 2422 that extends vertically on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and allows game balls to circulate, and below the right side passage 2422 below the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422. The left side passage 2421 extends to the left so that the game ball can be circulated, and the left side of the attacker passage 2423 extends to the left so that the left end side is lower and guides the game ball. A possible attacker shelf 2424.

  In the gate passage 2420, a gate portion 2003 is disposed near the upper portion, and a second start port 2004 is disposed at the lower portion. The gate passage 2420 passes through both the left and right walls so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422 between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends vertically with a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker passage 2423 has a second big prize opening 2006 in the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421. In this attacker passage 2423, a second big prize opening door 2413 for closing the second big prize opening 2006 so as to be opened and closed forms a part of the bottom wall. Further, the lower left end side of the attacker passage 2423 is open downward. The second big prize opening 2006 is opened with a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker shelf 2424 has a first grand prize opening 2005 opened, and a first grand prize opening door 2412 that closes the first big prize opening 2005 so as to be opened and closed forms a part. The first big prize opening 2005 is opened with a width about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. A sub-out port 2007 is opened at the right end of the attacker shelf 2424. In addition, one general winning opening 2001 is opened at the lower left of the left end of the attacker shelf 2424.

  The second starting port door 2411 can close the second starting port 2004 opened forward from the front, and can rotate around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. The second starter door 2411 rotates (turns) so that the upper side moves forward, thereby opening the second starter 2004, closing the gate passage 2420, and flowing down the gate passage 2420. The game ball can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and received in the second starting port 2004. The second start port door 2411 is formed to be rotated by driving the start port solenoid 2107. When the start port solenoid 2107 is OFF (when not energized), the second start port 2004 is closed and the start port is closed. When the solenoid 2107 is ON (when energized), the second start port 2004 is opened.

  The first grand prize opening door 2412 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first grand prize opening door 2412 closes the first big prize opening 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attacker shelf 2424, and moves the game ball flowing down on the attacker shelf 2424 to the left And is discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. Also, the first grand prize opening door 2412 retreats to open the first big prize opening 2005, and the game balls that have flowed down onto the attacker shelf 2424 via the attacker passage 2423 or the like are collected in the first grand prize winning opening. 2005 can be accepted. The first grand prize opening door 2412 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving the first attacker solenoid 2108. When the first attacker solenoid 2108 is OFF (when not energized), the first big prize opening 2005 is closed. When the first attacker solenoid 2108 is ON (when energized), the first big prize opening 2005 is opened.

  The second grand prize opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left and right directions so that the left end is lowered while extending in the front and rear directions. The second large prize opening door 2413 opens upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second grand prize opening door 2413 moves forward to close the second big prize opening 2006 and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2423, and includes a gate passage 2420, a left side passage 2421, and a right side passage. The game ball that has passed through any one of 2422 is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. In addition, the second grand prize opening door 2413 is retracted to open the second big prize opening 2006, and the game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2423 can be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006 with a high probability. it can. The second grand prize opening door 2413 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving the second attacker solenoid 2109. When the second attacker solenoid 2109 is OFF (when not energized), the second big prize opening 2006 is closed. When the second attacker solenoid 2109 is ON (when energized), the second big prize opening 2006 is opened.

  Also, the attacker unit 2400 includes an internal passage 2430 through which game balls received in the second grand prize opening 2006 can flow, a first reception opening (first ball passage) 2431 opened at the bottom of the internal passage 2430, and A second receiving port (second ball passage) 2432, a sorting piece 2433 that distributes game balls to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and the first receiving port 2431. A first receiving port sensor 2434 for detecting a game ball and a second receiving port sensor 2435 for detecting a game ball received in the second receiving port 2432.

  The internal passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second big prize winning port sensor 2402. The first receiving port 2431 is disposed immediately below the portion through which the game ball passes in the second grand prize opening sensor 2402, and the second receiving port 2432 is disposed on the right side of the first receiving port 2431 in front view. . The sorting piece 2433 is disposed between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis whose lower side extends in the front-rear direction. The sorting piece 2433 stands vertically and communicates with the second grand prize opening 2006 and the first receiving port 2431, and the upper side moves to the left in front view to the left side wall of the internal passage 2430. Attached (or approached) so as to rotate between a state in which the second big prize opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are in communication with each other. This sorting piece 2433 is formed so as to rotate by driving the sorting solenoid 2110. When the sorting solenoid 2110 is OFF (when not energized), the game balls are sorted to the first receiving port 2431 and sorted. When the solenoid 2110 is ON (when energized), the game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

  The attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the gate passage 2420 is located immediately below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 described later, and the gate portion 2003 is located above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. In addition, the first grand prize opening 2005 and the general prize opening 2001 are located below the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100.

  Next, the flow of game balls in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is positioned above the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 is not moved even if a game ball is released from the stage 2530. Never pass. Therefore, only the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can pass through the gate portion 2003. Since the upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed opens upward immediately below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500, the right side of the center accessory 2500 The game ball that has flowed down will enter the gate passage 2420 with a high probability and pass through the gate portion 2003.

  Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 immediately below it. At this time, if the second starter door 2411 rotates forward and is in the open position, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second starter door 2411 and is second. It is guided to the start port 2004 side and is received by the second start port 2004. The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401). Since it is driven at the same time, by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starter door 2411, etc., the game ball itself having the “normal hit” lottery is accepted into the second starter 2004. be able to.

  The game ball received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game that has passed through the gate portion 2003. A sphere may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 through a rarely communicating portion. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate part 2003 does not necessarily pass through the front of the second start door 2411.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center object 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 disposed on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420, It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

  A game ball released from any one of the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2423 is guided to the left along the inclination of the attacker passage 2423, and downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. Is released. At this time, if the second grand prize opening door 2413 closing the second big prize opening 2006 is retreated and the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, the game balls released into the attacker passage 2423 are It is accepted with high probability in the second big prize opening 2006. The game ball received in the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2402 and then sent to the internal passage 2430, and the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 by the sorting piece 2433. It is distributed to either.

  The game ball received in the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2434 or the second receiving port sensor 2435 and is moved downward (substrate holder) 1200)).

  In addition, since the width of the second big prize opening 2006 is about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, the second big prize opening door 2413 is retracted and the second big prize opening 2006 is Even if it is open, depending on the speed, behavior, etc. of the game balls circulating in the attacker passage 2423, the game balls may jump over the second big prize opening 2006 and may not be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006. .

  The game balls released from the attacker passage 2423 flow down onto the attacker shelf 2424, are guided to the attacker shelf 2424, and are released downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. At this time, if the first grand prize opening door 2412 is retracted and the first big prize opening 2005 is opened, the game balls released from the attacker passage 2423 are accepted into the first big prize opening 2005. . Therefore, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center bonus 2500 while the first game winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball is placed at the first game winning opening 2005 with a high probability. Can be accepted.

  The game balls received in the first big prize opening 2005 are detected by the first big prize opening sensor 4005 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

  There is a possibility that a game ball released downward from the attacker shelf 2424 may be received by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then transferred to the right delivery port 3136 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls that have not been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1126 at the lower end of the gaming area 5a and are discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the center combination in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the center combination as viewed from the back. In the game area 5a, the center accessory 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has been. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes the effect units provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame from the front. be able to.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball that has been driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2520 can be discharged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front. An open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 capable of releasing the game ball released from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then released into the game area 5a are provided (see FIG. 120 and the like). .

  The stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2530 can discharge the game ball into the game area 5a from the lowest portions on both sides of the center formed in a wave shape.

  The center accessory 2500 has a chance entrance 2535 that is opened forward at the highest position of the slightly higher central portion of the stage 2530, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2535. A chance exit 2536 for discharging into the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Thus, when a game ball is released from the chance exit 2536, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in the front view to the left and then releases it downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located immediately above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) in the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Has been.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed such that the right outer peripheral surface is separated from the right rail 1005 in the front component member 1000 slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball when assembled to the game board 5. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls that circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 enter the right guide passage 2540. Enter and be guided. As a result, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center object 2500 (so-called “right-stroke”), the game ball can pass through the gate portion 2003 with a very high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the back unit is disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. is there. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In addition, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the board side effect display device 1600, an effect drive board 3031 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear surface of the back box 3010 A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view 3031, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 on the rear side of the back box 3010, and an effect drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010 And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view of 3031.

  The effect drive board 3031 is based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit. The decorative board, the drive motor, and the like provided in 3500 and the lower back movable effect unit 3700 are controlled. The panel relay board 3032 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a first start port sensor 3112, a second start port sensor 4004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024, a first big prize port sensor 4005, a second Big winning opening sensor 2402, first receiving opening sensor 2434, second receiving opening sensor 2435, general winning opening sensor 3111, gate sensor 2401, start opening solenoid 2107, first attacker solenoid 2108, second attack solenoid 2109, distribution solenoid The connection with 2110 is relayed.

  The lower left relay board 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the back left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay board 3034 connects the effect driving board 3031 to the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. Is relayed.

  The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear sides of the presentation drive board 3031, the panel relay board 3032, the lower left relay board 3033, and the lower right relay board 3034. A board cover 3035, a panel relay board cover 3036, a lower left relay board cover 3037, and a lower right relay board cover 3038 are provided.

  The back unit 3000 includes a front front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the left side and the lower side in front view, and a back attached to surround the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 respectively attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back movable movable effect unit 3500 attached and a back lower movable effect unit 3700 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b, and two fixed grooves 3010c into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the right side in the back view of the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b. And a notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the liquid crystal attaching part 3010b.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

[5-9b. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132. FIG. 132 (a) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 132 (b) is an enlarged sectional view taken along line TT in FIG. The front front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to extend from the front side left side of the front end of the back box 3010 to the lower side.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L shape (a crescent shape) along the left side and the lower side at the front end of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. A general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting a gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting a gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 of the front unit 2000, A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting illegal magnetism applied from the outside is provided in the game area 5a.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 extends vertically along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3110. The back front decoration unit 3120 is attached to the front of the back front decoration unit 3120. A unit base that extends to the left and right along the side of the box 3010 and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3110, and a lower part on the left side of the front front and bottom decoration unit 3130 in the front view. And a ball guiding unit 3150 attached to the front surface of 3110.

  As shown in the drawing, the back left decorative unit 3120 of the back front decorative unit 3100 includes a translucent flat front left decorative ornament 3121 having a character decoration of “dododo”, and a front left decorative A transparent and flat front left light guide lens 3122 attached to the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs 3123a capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the back front left light guide lens 3122 are mounted. And a front left decorative substrate 3123 (see FIG. 132B).

  The back front left light guide lens 3122 has a plurality of reflective portions 3122 a formed in a conical shape on the rear surface behind the “D” -shaped decoration in the back front left decorative ornament 3121. The light incident on the inside from the left side surface of the back front left light guide lens 3122 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3122 a and is arranged in front of the back front left light guide lens 3122. 3121 can be light-decorated in a planar shape.

  The back front and bottom decorative unit 3130 of the back front decorative unit 3100 is arranged so as to correspond to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and has a front and back lower center lens 3131 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface. The back front bottom left lens 3132 and the back front bottom right lens 3133, which are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the back front bottom center lens 3131 and have a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the front, and the back front bottom center lens 3131 A back front lower left lens 3132 and a back front lower decorative board 3134 which is disposed on the rear side of the back front lower right lens 3133 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light from the LED on the front lower back decorative substrate, the back front lower center lens 3131, the back front lower left lens 3132, and the back front lower right lens 3133 can be decorated with light emission independently.

  Further, the back front lower decoration unit 3130 opens forward in the upper center of the back front lower center lens 3131, and a game ball guided to the rear by being received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is provided. An enterable central delivery port 3135 and a game ball opened to the front on the right outside of the lower front lower center lens 3131 and received in the general winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and guided backwards enter. And a possible left delivery port 3137. The game ball that has entered the central delivery port 3135 is detected by the first start port sensor 3112 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200). Further, the game ball that has entered the right delivery port 3136 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

  The ball guiding unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be disposed below the back front bottom left lens 3132 in the back front bottom decoration unit 3130. The ball guiding unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and is opened forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery ports 3151 into which game balls can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball that has entered the interior from the delivery port 3151 downward (on the substrate holder 1200). The game balls that have entered the interior from the delivery port 3151 are discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back movable movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear wall in the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The back middle movable effect unit 3200 is arranged on the left side in a front view and extends vertically higher than the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and has a back middle left decorative body 3210 having a predetermined decoration. And a back middle right decorative body 3220 having a predetermined decoration which is higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and has a predetermined decoration, and an opening 3010a in the rear wall of the back box 3010. And a back middle drive unit 3250 which is attached to both upper and lower outer sides and moves the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 in the left-right direction.

  The back center left decorative body 3210 is disposed on the rear side of the back center left decorative lens 3211 having a translucent flat middle back decorative lens 3211 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and on the front side. A back center left decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back surface attached to the rear side of the back center left decorative lens 3211 so as to cover the rear surface of the back center left decorative substrate And a left decorative body base 3212. Although not shown, the back center left decorative body base 3212 is provided with a rack gear at the lower end that extends left and right and has gear teeth formed upward. The back center left decorative body 3210 can light-decorate the back center left decorative lens 3211 by causing the LED of the back center left decorative substrate to emit light.

  The back middle right decorative body 3220 is arranged on the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a translucent flat middle back decorative lens 3221 having a relief-like decoration formed on the front surface, and on the front side. A back middle right decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back middle attached to the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 so as to cover the rear face of the back middle right decorative board And a right decorative body base 3222. The back middle right decorative body base 3222 is provided with a rack gear which extends to the left and right and has gear teeth formed downward, although not shown. This back middle right decorative body 3220 can light-decorate the back middle right decorative lens 3221 by causing the LED of the back middle right decorative board to emit light.

  The back center left decorative lens 3211 and the back center right decorative lens 3221 of the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are formed symmetrically with each other. 5 is formed in such a shape that the side close to the center in the left-right direction is curled.

  The back middle drive unit 3250 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and supports an upper rail 3251 that supports the upper ends of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A flat unit base 3252 that supports the lower ends of the middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 to be slidable in the left-right direction, and an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252. A flat mounting base 3253 mounted on the lower side, a back middle drive motor 3254 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3252 so that the rotation shaft projects between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252, and The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted and the front surface of the mounting base 3253 can be rotated. Attached to and pinion gear rack and is engaged in the rack gear and the back in the right decorations 3220 of the back in the left ornamental body 3210 to be sandwiched from above and below (not shown) in which it provided with a.

  In the normal state, the back middle movable effect unit 3200 has the left and right back center left decorative bodies 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 in a retracted position in which they are farthest from each other. In this state, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 114 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front by driving the back center drive motor 3254 from the normal state, the rack gear of the back center left decorative body 3210 meshing with the pinion gear and the back center right decorative body 3220 By the rack gear, the back center left decorative body 3210 moves to the right and the back center right decorative body 3220 moves to the left.

  As a result, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 that have been separated from each other move so as to approach each other, and the movement stops immediately before coming into contact with each other. In this state, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are located at the approximate center (appearance position) on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back center left decorative body 3210 The decoration with the back middle right decorative body 3220 is combined to form a single large decoration (decoration that imitates a cherry blossom petal) (see FIG. 170).

[5-9d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left outer side in front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable effect unit 3400 with the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back left movable effect unit 3300 includes a back left decorative body 3310 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back left rotation drive unit 3330 that rotates the back left decorative body 3310 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back-left movement drive unit 3350 that is attached and moves the upper end side of the back-left rotation drive unit 3330 in the left-right direction, and a lower-end side of the back-left rotation drive unit 3330 that is attached in the back box 3010 is guided to be movable in the left-right direction. The rear left lower guide rail 3370 and the rear left upper decorative body 3390 attached to the front side of the rear left moving drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration are provided.

  The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular prism shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back left decorative body 3310 is composed of a first decorative surface 3311 on which a relief of the Deva image is formed, a second decorative surface 3312 on which a predetermined character decoration is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3312. And a third decorative surface 3313 on which decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed to have translucency. Further, the back left decorative body 3310 is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion at the lower end, although not shown.

  The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3331 so as to protrude forward and to the front of the movement base 3331 extending vertically and attached to the back left movement drive unit 3350 so as to be movable left and right. A lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supporting the lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to the upper part of the moving base 3331 so as to protrude above the back left decorative body 3310; A back left rotation drive motor (not shown), which is attached to the upper rotation base so that the rotation shaft protrudes downward, and the rotation shaft penetrating the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310; A motor cover 3333 attached to the moving base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotation drive motor, and inside the back left decorative body 3310 The lower end with being location includes a Urahidari decorative substrate 3334 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3332 is mounted (see FIG. 119), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3331 is provided with a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3332 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decorative body 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 has a protrusion that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the back left lower guide rail 3370.

  The back left decorative substrate 3334 is disposed inside the back left decorative body 3310 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft portion. Although this back left decorative substrate 3334 is not shown, the upper end side is supported relatively rotatably on the lower side of the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. Thus, only the back left decorative body 3310 is formed to rotate by driving the back left rotation drive motor. Further, the LED of the back left decorative board 3334 always faces forward, and only a portion of the back left decorative body 3310 positioned in front of the back left decorative board 3334 (that is, a decorative surface facing forward) is decorated with light emission. be able to.

  The back left drive unit 3350 has a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and a rotating shaft protruding rearward through the unit base 3351. The back left movement drive motor 3352 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotating shaft of the back left movement drive motor 3352, and the drive gear 3353 meshing with the back left rotation. A pinion gear (not shown) that meshes with the rack gear of the drive unit 3330 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3351, and a moving base of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 that is attached to the lower front portion of the unit base 3351. Slide rail with 3331 movably mounted in the left-right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the back left movement drive unit 3350 rotates the pinion gear counterclockwise in the front view via the drive gear 3353 by the back left movement drive motor 3352, the back left rotation drive is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) can be moved rightward.

  The back left lower guide rail 3370 is attached near the left end under the opening 3010a on the front surface of the back wall of the back box 3010. The back left lower guide rail 3370 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. This back left lower guide rail 3370 inserts a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 into the opening on the upper surface, thereby guiding the protrusion so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Can do.

  The back upper decoration body 3390 is attached to the rear left upper decoration lens 3391 having a translucent shape with a predetermined decoration and the rear left upper decoration lens 3391, and the unit base 3351 of the back left movement drive unit 3350. A decorative body base 3392 attached to the front surface, and a back upper left decorative substrate (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3392 and the back upper left decorative lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back left top decorative body 3390 can light up and decorate the back top top decorative lens 3391 by causing the LED on the back top top decorative substrate to emit light.

  In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state (retracted position) where the back left rotation drive unit 3330 (back left decorative body 3310) has moved to the leftmost side by the back left movement drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decorative body 3310 is positioned behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100, and is blocked by the back front left decorative unit 3120 so that it can be almost visually recognized from the front. Not possible (see FIG. 114 etc.).

  In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decorative body 3310 can be moved to the right via the back left rotation drive unit 3330. When reaching the right end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the left moving drive unit 3350, the movement stops. In this appearance position state, the back left decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display It is located near the left end on the front surface of the device 1600 and is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  Further, the back left movable effect unit 3300 rotates the back left decorative body 3310 with the back left rotational drive motor of the back left rotational drive unit 3330, or the first decorative surface 3311 and the second decoration of the back left decorative body 3310. The rotation can be stopped such that either the surface 3312 or the third decorative surface 3313 faces the front. The back left decorative body 3310 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outer side in front view of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back right movable effect unit 3400 includes a back right decoration body 3410 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back right rotation drive unit 3430 for rotating the back right decoration body 3410 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back-right movement drive unit 3450 that is attached and moves the upper end side of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left-right direction, and a lower-end side of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 that is attached in the back box 3010 is guided to be movable in the left-right direction. The back right lower guide rail 3470 and the back right upper decorative body 3490 attached to the front side of the back right moving drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back right decorative body 3410 is formed in a triangular prism shape extending vertically and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back right decorative body 3410 has different characters from the first decorative surface 3411 on which the relief of the Deva image is formed, the second decorative surface 3412 on which the decoration of a predetermined character is formed, and the second decorative surface 3412. And a third decorative surface 3413 on which a decoration is formed. The back right decorative body 3410 is formed to have translucency. Further, the back right decorative body 3410 is provided with a cylindrical shaft portion at the lower end, although not shown.

  The back-right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to the lower part of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude forward and the movement base 3431 extending vertically so as to be movable in the left-right direction by the back-right movement drive unit 3450. A lower rotation base 3432 rotatably supporting the lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotation base (not shown) attached to the upper part of the moving base 3431 so as to protrude above the back right decoration body 3410; A back right rotation drive motor (not shown), which is attached to the upper rotation base so that the rotation shaft protrudes downward, and the rotation shaft passing through the upper rotation base is attached to the upper end of the back right decoration body 3410; A motor cover 3433 attached to the moving base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-right rotation drive motor, and inside the back-right decoration body 3410 The lower end with being location includes a back right decorative substrate 3434 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3432 is mounted (see FIG. 119), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3431 is provided with a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3432 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decorative body 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a protrusion that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the back lower right guide rail 3470.

  The back right decorative board 3434 is disposed inside the back right decorative body 3410 through the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown in the drawing, the upper right side of the back right decorative substrate 3434 is supported relatively rotatably on the lower side of the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410. Thus, only the back right decorative body 3410 is formed to rotate by driving the back right rotation drive motor. Further, the LED of the back right decorative board 3434 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back right decorative body 3410 located in front of the back right decorative board 3434 (that is, the decorative surface facing front) is decorated with light emission. be able to.

  The back right movement drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and a rotation shaft protruding rearward through the unit base 3451. The back right movement drive motor 3452 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3451, the drive gear 3453 attached to the rotation shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3452, and meshed with the drive gear 3453 and rotated back right. A pinion gear (not shown) that meshes with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3451, and a moving base of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 that is attached to the lower front portion of the unit base 3451. Slide rail with 3431 movably mounted in the left-right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the back right movement drive unit 3450 rotates the pinion gear clockwise through the drive gear 3453 by the back right movement drive motor 3452, the back right rotation drive unit is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. 3430 (back right decorative body 3410) can be moved to the left.

  The back lower guide rail 3470 is attached near the right end under the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back lower right guide rail 3470 extends left and right, and is formed in a box shape having an upper surface opened. This back lower right guide rail 3470 inserts a protrusion protruding from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 into the opening on the upper surface, thereby guiding the protrusion so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. be able to.

  The back upper right decorative body 3490 has a translucent back right upper decorative lens 3491 in which a predetermined decoration is formed, and is attached to the rear side of the back right upper decorative lens 3491. The back right moving drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451. A decorative body base 3492 attached to the front surface, and a back upper right decorative board (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3492 and the back upper right decorative lens 3491 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper right decorative body 3490 can light up and decorate the back upper right decorative lens 3491 by causing the LED of the back upper right decorative board to emit light.

  In the normal state, the back-right movable effect unit 3400 is in a state where the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 (back-right decoration body 3410) has moved to the rightmost side (retracted position) by the back-right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decorative body 3410 is located behind the right side of the center accessory 2500, and a part thereof can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 114 and the like). reference).

  In this normal state, by driving the back-right movement drive motor 3452 of the back-right movement drive unit 3450, the back-right decoration body 3410 can be moved to the right via the back-right rotation drive unit 3430. When reaching the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the right movement drive unit 3450, the movement stops. In the state of this appearance position, the back right decorative body 3410 is located on the left side of the right side of the center accessory 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430, and on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located in the vicinity of the right end, and is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  Also, the back right movable effect unit 3400 rotates the back right decorative body 3410 with the back right rotational drive motor of the back right rotational drive unit 3430 or the first decorative surface 3411 and the second decoration of the back right decorative body 3410. The rotation can be stopped such that either the surface 3412 or the third decorative surface 3413 faces forward. The back right decorative body 3410 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearance position.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of the rear movable movable unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back movable production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 158. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the backside movable effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the backside movable effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable stage production knit mainly disassembled for each constituent unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded view of the rear upper movable stage unit for each main constituent unit and viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view. The back upper movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010.

  The back movable production unit 3500 includes a back first decorative body unit 3510 having a predetermined character decoration, and a back second decorative body unit having a character decoration different from the back first decorative body unit 3510. 3530, a back third decorative body unit 3550 having a decoration of characters different from those of the back first decorative body unit 3510 and the back second decorative body unit 3530, and a back first decorative body at the longitudinal center. The unit 3510 is attached so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the back-side second decorative body unit 3530 and the back-side third decorative body unit 3550 extend back and forth in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction. A back-side rotation base unit 3570 that is rotatably mounted relative to the surrounding axis, and the back-side rotation base unit 3570 passes through the back-side rotation base unit 3570. The decorative body unit 3510 is non-rotatably attached, and the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 are moved up and down, and the back upper lift unit 3600 attached in the back box 3010 is provided. Yes.

[5-9f-1. 1st decorative body unit on the back]
Next, the back first decorative body unit 3510 in the back top movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the backside first decorative body unit in the backside movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the backside first decorative body unit as seen from the back. FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the backside first decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the backside first decorative body unit as seen from the back. FIG. 139 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) shows the drive system when the back top first decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from a front. The back first decorative body unit 3510 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back top lift unit 3600 so as not to rotate.

  The back first decorative body unit 3510 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 which are formed so as to have a predetermined character in a pair and have translucency. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 having translucency and disposed behind the left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and having a predetermined decoration, and the rear of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 The back side first decorative substrate 3514 that is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and is attached to the rear side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the rear surface of the back top first decorative substrate 3514. The first decorative body base 3515 having a flat plate shape is provided. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 is provided with a decoration simulating lightning.

  The back first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and the left end is the left outside of the first decorative body base 3515 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511. A first lower arm 3516 having a rack gear 3516a attached to the rear side and extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3516b penetrating back and forth on the lower side of the rack gear 3516a and extending left and right; A lower arm presser 3517 that is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3516b of the first decorative body base 3515 and is slidably mounted in the left-right direction in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. It has.

  The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and the right end is the right outer side of the first decorative body base 3515 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. A first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a attached to the rear side and extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3518b penetrating back and forth on the upper side of the rack gear 3518a and extending left and right; An upper arm presser 3519 which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3518b and which is slidably attached to the first upper arm 3518 in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. I have.

  Further, the back first decorative body unit 3510 has a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a that meshes with a rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and a rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3520a. A first opening / closing gear member 3520 having a small-diameter driving gear portion 3520b integrally formed and rotatably attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 is provided.

  The back first decorative body unit 3510 has a flat plate shape on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and extends in the vertical direction, and the first opening / closing gear member on the right side. A drive rack gear 3521a extending vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b of 3520, a receiving boss 3521b projecting in a columnar shape rearward from the lower portion of the rear surface, and a slit 3521c penetrating back and forth and extending vertically near the left side. The first opening / closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521 are attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515. In cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515, the first opening / closing arm 3521 is moved in the vertical direction. And an open / close arm presser 3522 that is slidably attached.

  Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has a left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a right end attached to the first upper arm 3518 so that the first upper arm 3518 is left in front view. A first opening / closing spring 3523 that is biased to move in the direction toward the right, and a first mounting base 3524 that is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520. And a horizontal lock hole 3525a that is attached to the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and that is open to the right outer peripheral surface, and the lower outer peripheral surface is formed at the same position as the horizontal lock hole 3525a in the front-rear direction. And a mounting shaft portion 3525c that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape on the rear side of the vertical locking hole 3525b. End and a, a first mounting shaft member 3525 attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back on the lift unit 3600.

  Next, the movement of the back first decorative body unit 3510 will be described in detail. The first upper decorative body unit 3510 on the back is between a closed position where the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in contact with each other and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left-right direction.

  A first upper arm 3518 to which a first right movable decorative lens 3512 is attached is disposed above the first lower arm 3516 to which the first left movable decorative lens 3511 is attached. Each is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with a rack gear 3516a extending leftward and rightward, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with a rack gear 3518a extending leftward and rightward. A rack gear 3516a of the arm 3516 and a rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 are opposed to each other. Between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is connected to the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. Each bites. Accordingly, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 (transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

  Accordingly, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first left movable decoration lens 3511 and the first right movable decoration are interposed via the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be moved. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in a direction away from each other (open position direction).

  In the back first decorative body unit 3510, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 has a driving gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and extends vertically to mesh with the driving gear portion 3520b. A first opening / closing arm 3521 having a driving rack gear 3521a is provided. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates, the first opening / closing arm 3521 slides in the vertical direction. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is disposed on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 as viewed from the front, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the first opening / closing arm 3521 slides downward. When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Can be slid in the direction approaching each other (the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are mutually connected. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  The back first decorative body unit 3510 has a first opening / closing spring 3523 that biases the first upper arm 3518 to move to the left, so that a force acts on the first opening / closing arm 3521. When not (in a normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid leftward by the biasing force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative The lens 3512 is in a closed position where the lenses 3512 are in contact with each other. In the closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a in the first lower arm 3516, and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3518a in the first upper arm 3518. Meshed. In this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is engaged with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3521a in the first opening / closing arm 3521 (see FIG. 139 (a)).

  When the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward from the closed position so as to resist the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide in directions away from each other. Then, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 139 (b)). The sliding stop at this open position is at the end of the slot in at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521. The lower arm press 3517, the upper arm press 3519, and the open / close arm press 3522 are in contact with each other, so that the slide is regulated.

  Therefore, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the back first decorative body unit 3510 has the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Is positioned in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so that the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is hardly visible from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 You can see the decoration. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other and the first The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

  Further, the back first decorative body unit 3510 causes the LEDs of the back top first decorative substrate 3514 to emit light appropriately, whereby the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the first fixed decorative lens. 3513 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the LED on the back first decorative substrate 3514 is caused to emit light when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is interposed. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the LED on the back first decorative substrate 3514 emits light, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are moved. Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 that faces the decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated and decorated.

[5-9f-2. Second decorative unit on the back]
Next, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 in the back top movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the backside second decorative body unit in the backside movable effect unit when viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the backside second decorative body unit when viewed from the back. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the backside second decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the backside second decorative body unit as seen from the back. FIG. 143 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the drive system when the back second decorative body unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 143 (b) is a drive system when the back second decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from a front. The back second decorative body unit 3530 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end in the front-rear direction near one end in the longitudinal direction of the back top rotation base unit 3570 (near the right end when in the horizontal position). It is mounted for rotation about an axis extending to.

  The back second decorative body unit 3530 is formed with a pair of one-to-one sets of decorations that form predetermined characters, and has a translucent second left movable decorative lens 3531 and second right movable decorative lens 3532, and first A second fixed decorative lens 3533 having a translucency, which is disposed behind the two left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and has a predetermined decoration, and the second fixed decorative lens 3533. The back side second decorative substrate 3534 arranged on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the rear surface of the back second decorative substrate 3534 A flat plate-like second decorative body base 3535. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 is provided with a decoration that mimics lightning.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and the left end is the left outer side of the second decorative body base 3535, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531. A second lower arm 3536 having a rack gear 3536a attached to the rear side and extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3536b penetrating back and forth on the lower side of the rack gear 3536a and extending left and right. A lower arm presser 3537 which is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3536b and which is slidably mounted in the left-right direction in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535. It has.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and the right end is the right outside of the second decorative body base 3535 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. A second upper arm 3538 having a rack gear 3538a that is attached to the rear side and that extends to the left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3538b that extends through the front and rear of the rack gear 3538a and extends to the left and right, and a second upper arm 3538 An upper arm presser 3539 which is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3538b and which is slidably attached to the second upper arm 3538 in cooperation with the second decorative body base 3535. I have.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3540a that meshes with a rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and a rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3540a. A second opening / closing gear member 3540 having a small-diameter driving gear portion 3540b that is integrally formed and rotatably attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 is provided.

  The back second decorative body unit 3530 has a flat plate shape on the left side when viewed from the front of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 and extends in the vertical direction, and the second opening / closing gear member on the right side. A drive rack gear 3541a extending vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b of 3540, a receiving boss 3541b projecting in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the upper end portion of the rear surface, and a slit 3541c penetrating back and forth in the vicinity of the left side and extending vertically. The second opening / closing arm 3541 has a second opening / closing arm 3541 and is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541. And an open / close arm presser 3542 slidably attached in the direction.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has a left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and a right end attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so that the second lower arm 3536 is viewed from the front right. A second opening / closing spring 3543 that is biased to move in the direction of movement, and a second attachment base 3544 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And. The second attachment base 3544 is attached to a second drive link gear member 3573 of the backside rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Next, the movement of the back second decorative body unit 3530 will be described in detail. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged between a closed position where the left and right second left movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in close contact with each other and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left-right direction.

  The second upper decorative body unit 3530 has a second upper arm 3538 to which a second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached above a second lower arm 3536 to which a second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. Each is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The second lower arm 3536 includes a rack gear 3536a extending leftward and rightward, and the second upper arm 3538 includes a rack gear 3538a extending leftward and rightward. The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 are opposed to each other. Between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is connected to the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. Each bites. Accordingly, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 (transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

  Accordingly, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative member are connected via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in the direction in which the lens 3532 approaches each other (the direction of the closed position). The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in directions away from each other (open position direction).

  Further, in the back second decorative body unit 3530, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 has a drive gear portion 3540b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3540a and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b. A second opening / closing arm 3541 having a driving rack gear 3541a is provided. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, the second opening / closing arm 3541 slides in the vertical direction. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is disposed on the left side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 as viewed from the front, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front, the second opening / closing arm 3541 slides downward. When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Can be slid in the direction approaching each other (the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are mutually connected. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  Since this back second decorative body unit 3530 has a second opening / closing spring 3543 that is biased so that the second lower arm 3536 moves to the right, a force acts on the second opening / closing arm 3541. When not (in a normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid to the right by the biasing force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative The lens 3532 is in a closed position where the lenses 3532 contact each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a in the second lower arm 3536 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3538a in the second upper arm 3538. Meshed. In this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3541a in the second opening / closing arm 3541 (see FIG. 143 (a)).

  When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward from the closed position so as to resist the biasing force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide in directions away from each other via the two lower arms 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 143 (b)). The sliding stop at this open position is at the end of the long hole in at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541. The lower arm presser 3537, the upper arm presser 3539, and the open / close arm presser 3542 are brought into contact with each other, so that sliding is regulated.

  Therefore, the back second decorative body unit 3530 has the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position. Is positioned in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so that the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is almost invisible from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 provide predetermined characters. You can see the decoration. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other to the second The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 can be seen.

  In addition, the back second decorative body unit 3530 causes the LEDs on the back second decorative substrate 3534 to emit light appropriately, whereby the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the second fixed decorative lens. 3533 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the LED on the back second decorative substrate 3534 is caused to emit light when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is passed through. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, if the LED of the back second decorative substrate 3534 is caused to emit light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3531 are movable. Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing the decorative lens 3532 can be decorated with light emission.

[5-9f-3. 3rd decorative body unit on the back]
Next, the back top third decorative body unit 3550 in the back top movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the back top third decorative body unit in the back top movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of the back top third decorative body unit from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the backside third decorative body unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the backside third decorative body unit as seen from the back. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper third decorative unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 147 (b) shows the drive system when the back third decorative unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from a front. The back third decorative body unit 3550 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end near the end opposite to the back top second decorative body unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the back top rotation base unit 3570 (horizontal position). (In the vicinity of the left end at the time of), it is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The third decorative body unit 3550 on the back is formed with a pair of one-to-one decorations that form predetermined characters, and has a translucent third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552, After the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553, which are disposed behind the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and have a predetermined decoration. The back side third decorative substrate 3554 which is arranged on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and is attached to the rear side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the rear surface of the back top third decorative substrate 3554. And a flat third decorative body base 3555. The third fixed decorative lens 3553 is provided with a decoration that mimics lightning.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part of the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and the left end is the left outer side of the third decorative body base 3555 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551. A third lower arm 3556 having a rack gear 3556a attached to the rear side and extending left and right on the upper side and a slit 3556b penetrating back and forth on the lower side of the rack gear 3556a and extending left and right. A lower arm presser 3557 which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3556b of the third decorative body base 3555 and which is slidably attached to the third lower arm 3556 in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555. It has.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction in the upper part of the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and the right end is the right outside of the third decorative body base 3555 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. A third upper arm 3558 having a rack gear 3558a attached to the rear side and extending left and right on the lower side and a slit 3558b penetrating back and forth on the upper side of the rack gear 3558a and extending left and right; An upper arm presser 3559 which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3558b and which is slidably attached to the third upper arm 3558 in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555. I have.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3560a that meshes with a rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and a rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3560a. A third opening / closing gear member 3560 having a small-diameter driving gear portion 3560b integrally formed and rotatably attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 is provided.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a flat plate shape on the left side when viewed from the front of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and extends in the vertical direction, and the third opening / closing gear member on the right side. Through a drive rack gear 3561a extending vertically that meshes with the drive gear portion 3560b of 3560, a third opening / closing arm 3561 having a slit 3561c penetrating back and forth in the vicinity of the left side and extending vertically, and a slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561. An opening / closing arm presser 3562 which is attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and which is slidably attached to the third opening / closing arm 3561 in cooperation with the third decorative body base 3555. .

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and a right end attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555. A third opening / closing spring 3563 that is biased to move in the direction of movement, and a third attachment base 3564 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560. And. The third attachment base 3564 is attached to a third drive link gear member 3578 of the backside rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Next, the movement of the back third decorative body unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a left and right third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 between a closed position where they are in close contact with each other and an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed to slide in the left-right direction.

  The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a third upper arm 3558 to which a third right movable decorative lens 3552 is attached above a third lower arm 3556 to which a third left movable decorative lens 3551 is attached. Each is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The third lower arm 3556 is provided with a rack gear 3556a extending leftward and rightward, and the third upper arm 3558 is provided with a rack gear 3558a extending leftward and rightward. A rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and a rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 are opposed to each other. Between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is connected to the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. Each bites. Thus, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in different directions in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative member are connected via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in the direction in which the lens 3552 approaches each other (the direction of the closed position). The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in a direction away from each other (open position direction).

  Further, in the back third decorative body unit 3550, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3560b. A third opening / closing arm 3561 having a driving rack gear 3561a is provided. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slidably attached in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, the third opening / closing arm 3561 slides in the vertical direction. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is disposed on the left side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 when viewed from the front, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third opening / closing arm 3561 slides downward. When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 Can be slid in the direction approaching each other (the direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are mutually connected. It can be slid in the direction of separation (the direction of the open position).

  The back third decorative body unit 3550 has a third opening / closing spring 3563 that urges the third lower arm 3556 to move to the right, so that a force acts on the third opening / closing arm 3561. When not (in a normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid to the right by the biasing force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative The lens 3552 is in a closed position where the lenses 3552 are in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a in the third lower arm 3556, and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3558a in the third upper arm 3558. Meshed. In this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3561a in the third opening / closing arm 3561 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  When the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward from the closed position so as to resist the biasing force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide in directions away from each other via the three lower arms 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. Then, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open position, the slide stops (see FIG. 147 (b)). The sliding stop at the open position is at the end of the slot in at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561. The lower arm presser 3557, the upper arm presser 3559, and the open / close arm presser 3562 are brought into contact with each other, so that sliding is regulated.

  Therefore, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the back third decorative body unit 3550 has the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is positioned in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so that the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is hardly visible from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are used for predetermined characters. You can see the decoration. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated from each other and the third left movable decorative lens 3552 is separated from them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 becomes visible.

  Further, the back third decorative body unit 3550 causes the LEDs on the back third decorative substrate 3554 to emit light appropriately so that the third left movable decorative lens 3551, the third right movable decorative lens 3552, and the third fixed decorative lens. 3553 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the LED on the back third decorative substrate 3554 is caused to emit light via the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, if the LED on the back third decorative substrate 3554 is caused to emit light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are movable. Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 that faces the decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated and decorated.

[5-9f-4. Backside rotating base unit]
Next, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view of the backside rotary base unit in the backside movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of the backside rotary base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper rotary base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the rear upper rotary base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the gear configuration of the backside rotation base unit from the front. FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the back rotation base unit from the front, and FIG. 152 (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the action lever in the non-action position from the front.

  The back surface rotation base unit 3570 of the back surface movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit in the back surface lift unit so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and is back on both ends in the longitudinal direction. The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back third decorative body unit 3550 are attached so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 extends in parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating in the front-rear direction in the center in the longitudinal direction, and front and rear in the vicinity of both ends in the longitudinal direction. A cylindrical tube protruding rearwardly from the outer periphery of the second hole 3571b, the third hole 3571c, and the first hole 3571a penetrating into the first hole 3571a and rotatably attached to the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 A backside rotating base having 3571d is provided. The first hole 3571a (the inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed in a size that allows the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back first decorative body unit 3510 to pass therethrough. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a and have the same size as each other. Further, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are respectively formed near the right end and the left end in the front view when the back upper rotation base 3571 is in a horizontally extended state (at the horizontal position). Yes. In the following, description will be given in the state where the back upper rotation base 3571 extends horizontally.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a rotation base driven gear 3572 that is attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 and extends in a semicircular arc concentric with the center of the first hole 3571a. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is formed in the shape of the upper half with respect to the circular ring with the central axis extending in the front-rear direction, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is attached so as to form a gap with the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the attachment cylinder portion 3571d. The rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base driving gear 3614 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 described later.

  Further, the back surface rotation base unit 3570 is formed in an annular shaft portion 3573a that is rotatably inserted into the second hole 3571b of the back surface rotation base 3571, and concentric and fan-shaped from the front end of the shaft portion 3573a. A second drive link gear member 3573 having a second link gear portion 3573b formed and having the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the back second decorative body unit 3530 attached to the front surface; A presser member 3574 that is attached from the rear side of the base 3571 to the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 and has a larger diameter than the second hole 3571b. The second drive link gear member 3573 has a second link gear portion 3573b having a larger diameter than the second hole 3571b. Further, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed with the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600. The second drive link gear member 3573 is restricted from moving back and forth with respect to the second hole 3571b by attaching a pressing member 3574 to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b. Mounted rotatably in the state.

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side of the second hole 3571b when viewed from the front, and the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573. The first link gear 3575 for a spur gear meshing with 3573b and the left side of the first first link gear 3575 for the second view are attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to be rotatable. A spur gear-like second link gear 3576 for spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3575 for second, and rotatable to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side of the second second link gear 3576 for front view. And a spur gear-like second third link gear 3577 that meshes with the second second link gear 3576.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second first link gear 3575 are meshed with each other through an opening formed in the back upper rotation base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 has the left end side approaching the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the back upper rotation base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 described later.

  Further, the back surface rotation base unit 3570 is formed in an annular shaft portion 3578a that is rotatably inserted into the third hole 3571c of the back surface rotation base 3571, and a concentric fan shape from the front end of the shaft portion 3578a. A third drive link gear member 3578 having a third link gear portion 3578b formed and having the rear surface of the third attachment base 3564 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 attached to the front surface, and the back surface rotation A pressing member 3579 that is attached from the rear side of the base 3571 to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 and has a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. The third drive link gear member 3578 has a third link gear portion 3578b having a larger diameter than the third hole 3571c. Further, the third link gear portion 3578b has the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600. The third drive link gear member 3578 is restricted from moving back and forth with respect to the third hole 3571c by attaching a pressing member 3579 to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c. Mounted rotatably in the state.

  Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the front side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the third hole 3571c in front view, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578. A third gear first link gear 3580 having a spur gear shape and a third gear first link gear 3580 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the front view. A third gear second link gear 3581 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580, and the rear second rotation base 3571 on the right side when viewed from the front of the third second link gear 3581. A spur gear-like third link gear 3582 that is attached and meshes with the third second link gear 3581.

  The third first link gear 3580 and the third second link gear 3581 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the back upper rotation base 3571. The third link gear 3582 for third has a right end side approaching the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the back upper rotation base 3571. The third third link gear 3582 meshes with the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 described later.

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the lower rear side between the first hole 3571a and the second hole 3571b in the rear upper rotation base 3571, and the rotation shaft penetrates the rear upper rotation base 3571. An action lever drive motor 3583 projecting forward, a spur gear-like action lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotating shaft of the action lever drive motor 3583, and an action lever drive gear 3588 meshing with the back upper rotation base A spur gear-like working lever pinion gear 3585 rotatably attached to the front surface of 3571, and a working lever rack gear 3586a meshing with the working lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extending left and right. An action lever 3586 slidably attached to the front surface of the rotation base 3571 in the left-right direction; An operation lever press 3587 that restricts the forward movement of the lever 3586 and is attached to the front surface of the back upper rotation base 3571, and a front side of the operation lever 3586 that is attached to the front surface of the back rotation base 3571. And an action lever movement detection sensor 3588 for detecting the movement of.

  The action lever 3586 is connected to the horizontally long rectangular main body part 3586b having the action lever rack gear 3586a formed on the lower side and the upper side of the main body part 3586b and extends to the left of the main body part 3586b in a strip shape. A slide mounting portion 3586c that is slidably mounted in the left and right direction on the upper front surface of the back upper rotation base 3571, and protrudes to the left from the left side of the main body portion 3586b, and a first mounting shaft member 3525 in the back first decorative body unit 3510. A lock piece 3586d that can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, a first extension part 3586e extending downward from the main body part 3586b, and a lock piece 3586d from the lower end of the first extension part 3586e. Of the first working portion 3586f projecting to the left and the upper side of the main body portion 3586b. A second right extension 3586g connected to the vicinity of the end and extending rightward, and a second extension extending downward from the right end of the second right extension 3586g to a position slightly higher than the first action portion 3586f. Two lower extending portions 3586h, a second working portion 3586i extending leftward from near the lower end of the left side of the second lower extending portion 3586h, and the lower end of the first extending portion 3586e from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c A third extending portion 3586j extending downward to substantially the same height as the third extending portion 3586j and a third action portion 3586k extending leftward from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the third extending portion 3586j (see FIG. 152).

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 attached to the front surface of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surfaces of the action lever drive gear 3584 and the action lever pinion gear 3585, and a rear upper rotation base 3571. The front rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 that detects the rotation position of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 and is attached to the lower side of the first hole 3571a on the front surface of the back surface, and the front side of the rear upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 A back rotation base relay substrate 3591 attached to the front surface of the back rotation base 3571 so as to cover, and a substrate attached to the front surface of the back rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the back rotation base relay substrate 3591 A cover 3592.

  The backside rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the backside rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lifting unit 3600. It is. The back top rotation base relay board 3591 includes a back top rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 in the back top lift unit 3600, a back top second decorative board 3534, a back top third decorative board 3554, an action lever drive motor 3583, The connection with the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 and the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 is relayed.

  Furthermore, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the second first link gear 3575, the second second link gear 3576, and the second third link gear 3577. It is attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, the second link gear 3581 for the third, and the third link gear 3582 for the third. A rear left gear cover 3594, and a motor cover 3595 attached to the rear side of the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the action lever drive motor 3583.

  Next, the movement of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In this backside rotation base unit 3570, a mounting cylinder part 3571d protruding rearward of the backside rotation base 3571 is inserted into the shaft cylinder part 3611a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lifting unit 3600. As a result, the movable unit 3610 is attached so as to rotate about the axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface. In addition, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is restricted from moving forward by the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back first decorative body unit 3510 that is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit through the mounting cylinder portion 3571d from the front. Is done. Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 rotatably attached to the second hole 3571b of the back upper rotation base 3571. By attaching the rear surface of the two attachment bases 3544, the backside second decorative body unit 3530 can be attached to be rotatable relative to the backside rotation base 3571. Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 rotatably attached to the third hole 3571c of the back upper rotation base 3571. By attaching the rear surface of the three attachment bases 3564, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be attached to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotation base 3571.

  The backside rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the backside lifting unit 3600, and the rotation base driven gear 3572 is engaged with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable side unit 3610. At the same time, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b of the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 (see FIG. 163). When the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by driving the back surface rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610, the back surface rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the first hole 3571a (attachment) via the rotation base driven gear 3572. It rotates around an axis extending back and forth about the axis of the cylindrical portion 3571d). The back upper rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position in which the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are arranged) extends horizontally, and the vertical that extends vertically. You can rotate 90 degrees between positions. In the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is located to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is located below the first hole 3571a. At this horizontal position, the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable unit 3610 in the back lifting unit 3600.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position around the first hole 3571a, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are moved to the movable side unit 3610. It moves so as to revolve around the central link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3511b revolves around the central link gear 3611b. The gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 each rotate, and each rotate relative to the back upper rotation base 3571.

  Then, when the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, the rotation of the second third link gear 3577 from the second third link gear 3577 and the second second link gear 3576 and the second It is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the second first link gear 3575, and the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the opposite direction to the second third link gear 3577, so that the third The third link gear 3582 is transmitted to the third link gear portion 3578b via the third second link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580, and the third drive link gear member 3578 is transferred to the third link gear portion 3578. The third link gear 3582 is rotated in the opposite direction.

  At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610, the rotation between the rear upper rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b. The angle and the rotation angle of the back upper rotation base 3571, the second link gear portion 3573b, and the third link gear portion 3578b are the same. Since the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610 is non-rotatably attached, when the back upper rotation base 3571 rotates, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b are moved back and forth. The center link gear 3611b is revolved without rotating around the extended axis. That is, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 has the first hole 3571a (movable side) with the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 kept in a constant vertical direction. The center link gear 3611b) of the unit 3610 can be revolved around the center.

  Further, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise by the action lever drive motor 3583 by the action lever drive motor 3583, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 moves the action lever 3586 to the left via the action lever rack gear 3586a. When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the action lever 3586 can be moved to the right via the action lever rack gear 3586a.

  More specifically, the action lever 3586 is assembled to the back upper rotation base unit 3570, and the main body portion 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a in the back upper rotation base 3571 in a front view. The slide mounting portion 3586c of the action lever 3586 extends leftward to the vicinity of the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper and outer sides of the first hole 3571a. The first action portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extending portion 3586g extends to the vicinity of the second hole 3571b above the second hole 3571b. The second lower extending portion 3586h extends so that the lower end is positioned below the second hole 3571b. The second working portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower portion of the second hole 3571b. The third extending portion 3586j has a lower end extending below the third hole 3571c. Accordingly, the third action portion 3586k is positioned below the third hole 3571c.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the action lever 3586 is a lock piece 3586d protruding leftward from the left side of the main body 3586b in a front view when moved to the leftmost (state of action position). However, it protrudes into the first hole 3571a. In this state, the left end of the first action portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located on the left side of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third working portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586 j of the action lever 3586 is detected by the action lever movement detection sensor 3588.

  On the other hand, in the state where the action lever 3586 is moved to the rightmost (state of the non-action position), the lock piece 3586d and the first action part 3586f are located to the right of the first hole 3571a. Further, the left end of the second action portion 3586i is located slightly to the left with respect to the center of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third action portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extending portion 3586j of the action lever 3586 is separated from the action lever movement detection sensor 3588, and is in a non-detection state.

  As will be described in detail later, the action lever 3586 is moved to the action position, and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b in the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back first decorative body unit 3510. By doing so, it is possible to restrict (lock) the rotation of the backside rotation base unit 3570 relative to the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lifting unit 3600. Therefore, when the operation lever 3586 is moved to the non-operation position, the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and is rotated backward on the movable side unit 3610 of the back lift unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

  The action lever 3586 has a first action part 3586f, a second action part 3586i, and a third action part 3586k with the left ends of the first opening / closing arm 3521 of the back first decorative body unit 3510, The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Accordingly, when the operation lever 3586 is moved to the operation position when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in the vertically extended state, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm are moved. The arm 3561 can be slid upward.

[5-9f-5. Back lifting unit]
Next, the back lift unit 3600 of the back top movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 to 158. FIG. 153 (a) is a perspective view of the backside lift unit in the backside movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 153 (b) is a perspective view of the backside lift unit from the back. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back lift unit as seen from the front after being disassembled into a movable side unit and a fixed side unit, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 155 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit of the rear lifting unit as seen from the front and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit as seen from the back. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed unit of the back lift unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed unit of the back lift unit as seen from the back. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the movable unit of the back lift unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 158 (b) is the drive when the movable unit of the back lift unit is in the lowered position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a system | strain from the front.

  The back upper lift unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back up / down unit 3600 includes a movable side unit 3610 to which the back first decorative body unit 3510 and the back top rotation base unit 3570 are attached on the front surface, and a fixed side unit that is attached to the back box 3010a by moving the movable side unit 3610 up and down. 3650.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 is attached to a substantially rectangular movable side base 3611 extending left and right in the front view, and an upper right corner on the front surface of the movable side base 3611. A rear rotation drive motor 3612 whose rear rotation shaft penetrates the movable side base 3611 and protrudes rearward; a rotation drive gear 3613 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612; and a rotation drive gear 3613; A rotation base drive gear 3614 that meshes with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the backside rotation base unit 3570 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side base 3611 is provided.

  The movable side unit 3610 includes a motor cover 3615 attached to the front surface of the movable side base 3611 so as to cover the backside rotation drive motor 3612, and a flat base attached to the rear side of the movable side base 3611. A cover 3616 and a movable relay board 3617 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3616 are provided.

  The movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft tube portion 3611a and the shaft tube portion 3611a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the lower part of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and rotates on the back side. A central link gear 3611b that meshes with the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570, and penetrates forward and backward at a position on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and extends to the left and right. A long-hole-shaped elevating slit 3611c and a rotation detection piece 3611d (attached to the lower side of the shaft tube portion 3611a on the front surface and detected by the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back rotation base unit 3570) (See FIG. 158).

  The shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the attachment cylinder portion 3571d of the back upper rotation base 3571 in the back upper rotation base unit 3570, and rotates the attachment cylinder portion 3571d. It can be inserted as possible. The central link gear 3611b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the rear upper rotation base unit 3570. At the same pitch.

  The movable-side relay board 3617 includes a back-side relay board 3659 of the fixed-side unit 3650, a back-side first decoration board 3514 of the back-side first decoration body unit 3510, and a back-side rotation base relay board 3591 of the back-side rotation base unit 3570. , And the backside rotation drive motor 3612 is relayed. The base cover 3617 is provided with elevating slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 at both left and right ends on the rear surface. Further, the lower end of the lifting spring 3657 of the fixed side unit 3650 is attached to the rear side of the base cover 3617.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the fixed side unit 3650 of the back lifting unit 3600 includes a substantially rectangular fixed side base 3651 that is attached in the back box 3010 and extends left and right in front view, and a fixed side base 3651. In the movable side unit 3610, a spur gear-like elevating gear portion 3652a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the center of the front surface of the elevating portion protrudes forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery on the front surface of the elevating gear portion 3652a. An elevating rotary body 3652 having an elevating drive pin 3652b slidably inserted into an elevating slit 3611c of the movable side base 3611 and an elevating detection piece 3652c extending in a fan shape outward from the elevating gear portion 3652a; , A lifting drive gear 3653 that meshes with the lifting gear portion 3652a of the lifting rotor 3652, and the lifting drive A 3653 is provided with a backing on elevation drive motor 3654 attached to the rear surface of which the fixed-side base 3651 attached to the rotating shaft.

  Further, the fixed side unit 3650 is attached to the front surface of the fixed side base 3651, and is mounted in the vicinity of both the left and right sides of the front surface of the fixed side base 3651 and the lift detection sensor 3655 that detects the detection piece 3652c of the rotating body 3652 for lifting. At the same time, a base cover 3616 of the movable unit 3610 is attached to the front surface, and a pair of up-and-down slide rails 3656 that can be expanded and contracted vertically, and both left and right sides of the lower part of the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651 outside the pair of up-and-down slide rails 3656 And a pair of elevating springs 3657 which are attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 and urged so that the movable side base 3611 moves upward.

  Further, the fixed side unit 3650 penetrates back and forth and extends in a semicircular arc shape, and has an insertion slit 3658a through which the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 can pass, and a pair of elevating slide rails 3656, a fixed-side front cover 3658 attached to the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651 so as to cover the front surface of the ascending / descending rotary body 3652, and a rear surface of the fixed-side base 3651, and the movable-side unit 3610 The backside relay board 3659 connecting the movable side relay board 3617, the backside lift drive motor 3654, the lift detection sensor 3655, and the lower right relay board 3034, and the back side of the backside relay board 3659 are covered. And a substrate cover 3660 attached to the rear side of the fixed side base 3651.

  Next, the operation of the back lifting unit 3600 will be described. The back lifting unit 3600 has a mounting cylinder portion 3571d of the back top rotation base 3571 in the back top rotation base unit 3570 rotatably inserted into the shaft tube portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610. The rear end of the first attachment shaft member 3525 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable base 3611 through the attachment cylinder portion 3571d of the upper rotation base 3571. Thereby, the movable unit 3610 attaches the back rotation base unit 3570 so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction around the shaft cylinder portion 3611a (first hole 3571a) in a state in which the backside rotation base unit 3570 is not movable forward. be able to.

  In a state in which the backside rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is engaged with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the backside rotation base unit 3570. Accordingly, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated via the rotation drive gear 3613 by driving the back surface rotation drive motor 3612, the back surface rotation base unit 3570 is rotated around the shaft tube portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). Can be made. The movable side unit 3610 can rotate the back upper rotation base unit 3570 by 90 degrees between a horizontally extending state and a vertically extending state. The rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the back rotation base unit 3570 when the back rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. .

  Further, in the assembled state, the back up / down lift unit 3600 is movable (movable up and down) only in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed unit 3650 by the pair of lift slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650. ing. In the movable side unit 3610, the up / down drive pins 3652b of the up / down rotating body 3652 in the fixed side unit 3650 are inserted into the up / down slits 3611c of the movable side base 3611 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Therefore, the position of the movable unit 3610 in the vertical direction is regulated by the height position of the lift drive pin 3652b in the lift rotating body 3652. The movable side unit 3610 is biased so as to move upward by a pair of lifting springs 3657.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), the back lifting unit 3600 has a lifting drive pin 3652b that revolves by the rotation of the lifting rotary member 3652, directly above the rotation center of the lifting rotary member 3652, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, it is located slightly to the right, and the movable unit 3610 is in the up position where it is located on the uppermost side by the lift drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652c of the up-and-down rotating body 3652 is detected by the up-and-down detection sensor 3655. In this state, the lift drive pin 3652b is in contact with the right end of the lift slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610.

  Accordingly, the weight on the movable unit 3610 side acts on the lifting drive pin 3652b, so that the lifting drive pin 3652b does not rotate even when the lifting rotary body 3652 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction through the lifting drive pin 3652b. Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c, the elevating rotating body 3652 can no longer rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the movable unit 3610 is prevented from moving downward. ing. That is, the movable unit 3610 is locked at the raised position. Accordingly, the weight (load) from the movable unit 3610 side does not act on the back up / down drive motor 3654 via the lift gear portion 3652a and the lift drive gear 3653 of the lift rotating body 3652, and the back A load is not applied to the up / down drive motor 3654.

  When the up / down rotary body 3652 is rotated counterclockwise by the back up / down drive motor 3654 from this raised position, the up / down drive pin 3652b of the up / down rotary body 3652 moves to the left. The revolving drive pin 3652b slides to the left in the elevating slit 3611c, and the movable side unit 3610 receives the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657 through the elevating slit 3611c. It will move down. When the elevating drive pin 3652b that revolves when the elevating rotating body 3652 rotates counterclockwise revolves downward beyond the same height as the rotation center of the elevating rotating body 3652, the left / right direction of the elevating drive pin 3652b The direction of the movement changes and moves downward while moving to the right, and slides to the right in the lifting slit 3611c.

  When the elevating drive pin 3652b is located immediately below the center of the elevating rotary body 3652, the rotation of the elevating rotary body 3652 stops, and at the same time, the downward movement of the movable side unit 3610 is stopped, and the movable side unit 3610 is stopped. Is in the lowered position (see FIG. 158 (b)). In addition, when moving the movable unit 3610 from the lowered position to the raised position, the back lifting drive motor 3654 is driven in the opposite direction to rotate the lifting rotary body 3652 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, it can be returned to the raised position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable unit 3610 is assisted by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657, and the load applied to the rear elevating drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  As described above, the back lifting unit 3600 has the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotation via the movable side unit 3610. The base unit 3570 can be moved up and down (lifted) between the raised position and the lowered position.

[5-9f-6. Operation of the movable production unit on the back]
Next, the operation of the back movable production unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system for raising and lowering when the movable unit of the rear lifting unit is in the raised position in the rear movable production unit, and FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the movement of the rear lifting unit in the rear movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when a side unit is a lowered position. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operating lever is in the operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back rotating base unit is in the horizontal position, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of an operation lever in a non-operation position when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position. FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the backside rotation base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the backside rotation base unit is in the horizontal position in the backside movable effect unit, and FIG. 164 is a backside movable effect unit. FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the backside rotation base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the backside rotation base unit is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position, and FIG. 165 is a backside movable effect unit FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the backside rotation base unit when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the backside rotation base unit is in the vertical position.

  FIG. 166 is an explanatory view showing a state where the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back rotating base unit is in the vertical position, and FIG. FIG. 168 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever restricts rotation at the action position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the backside rotary base unit is in the vertical position in the effect unit. FIG. When the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back rotary base unit is in the vertical position, the operating lever acts on the back first decorative body unit, back second decorative body unit, and back top third decorative body unit in the operating position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which has exerted.

  As shown in FIG. 159 and the like, the backside movable production unit 3500 is in a state where the movable side unit 3610 of the backside lift unit 3600 is in the most elevated position, and the backside rotation base unit. 3570 is in a horizontal position extending horizontally. In this state, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged on the left and right sides with the back top first decorative body unit 3510 as the center. Also, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back top second decorative body unit 3530. 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively a first open / close spring 3523, a second open / close spring 3543, and a third open / close spring 3563. Due to the urging force, they are in a closed position where they are in contact with each other.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 159, the raising / lowering driving pin 3652b of the fixed side unit 3650 in the back raising / lowering unit 3600 is located slightly to the right of the rotation center of the raising / lowering rotating body 3652. Thus, the movable base 3611 is in contact with the right end of the lifting slit 3611c extending to the left and right. As a result, the back-side first decorative body unit 3510, the back-top second decorative body unit 3530, the back-top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back-top drive pin 3652b via the lift slit 3611c of the movable side unit 3610. Even if the weight (load) of the rotation base unit 3570 and the movable side unit 3610 is applied, the elevating drive pin 3652b cannot revolve further in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the lower side of the movable side unit 3610. Movement is restricted and locked in the raised position.

  Accordingly, in a normal state, the loads on the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top rotating base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 are reduced. The back up / down drive motor 3654 does not act, and no load is applied to the back up / down drive motor 3654. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3652c of the lifting rotary body 3652 that revolves the lifting drive pin 3652b is detected by the lifting detection sensor 3655.

  From this normal state, when the back up / down drive motor 3654 is driven to cause the up / down drive pin 3652b of the up / down rotating body 3652 to revolve counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the up / down drive pin 3652b moves within the up / down slit 3611c. As the elevating drive pin 3652b is lowered, the movable side unit 3610 moves downward, and when the elevating drive pin 3652b reaches the lowest position, the revolving of the elevating drive pin 3652b stops. Thus, the movable side unit 3610 is positioned at the lowered position (see FIG. 160).

  The back movable production unit 3500 moves the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 to the lowered position, so that the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decoration. The body unit 3550 and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 can be positioned at the upper part on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 174).

  When moving the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 between the raised position and the lowered position, the back movable movable unit 3500 moves the operating lever 3586 of the back rotating base unit 3570 to the operating position. Yes. In a state where the action lever 3586 is moved to the action position on the left side by the action of the action lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. 161, the lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 has the back first decorative body unit 3510. The first mounting shaft member 3525 is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a. As a result, the action lever 3586 cannot rotate around the first attachment shaft member 3525, so that the back-side rotation base unit 3570 to which the action lever 3586 is attached becomes the first attachment shaft member 3525 (movable side). The rotation is locked with respect to the shaft tube portion 3611a) of the unit 3610. That is, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in a state where the rotation is locked at the horizontal position.

  Since the lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 has a tapered tip, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 can be used even if the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is slightly deviated from the horizontal position. By inserting it into 3525a, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 can be moved to the horizontal position to lock the rotation.

  In this action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extending portion 3586 g of the action lever 3586 abuts on the receiving boss 3541 b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back second decorative body unit 3530 from above. In addition, the third extending portion 3586j (the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with a predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 from the right side. Accordingly, the action lever 3586 rotates the back upper rotation base 3571 around the second hole 3571b in the back second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper rotation in the back third decorative body unit 3550. The base 3571 is prevented from rotating around the axis around the third hole 3571c. Accordingly, by moving (moving up and down) the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 in the vertical direction, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotating base unit 3570 are moved. Even if the vibration is applied, the back second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotation base unit 3570 are not shaken by the action of the action lever 3586 located at the action position. ing.

  Through the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotating base unit 3570 are When the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise by the action lever drive motor 3583 via the action lever drive gear 3584 while being in the lowered position, the action lever pinion gear 3585 is engaged. The action lever rack gear 3586a moves the action lever 3586 in the horizontal state to the right non-action position, and the lock piece 3586d is removed from the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 162). Accordingly, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the shaft tube portion 3611a of the movable side base 3611). Will be able to.

  In the back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500, as shown in FIG. 163, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the movable side unit 3610, and for the second use. The third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b in the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610.

  Then, with the back rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the action lever 3586 in the non-action position, the back rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 is driven to view the rotation base drive gear 3614 in front view. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is moved to the center link gear 3611b (first hole 3571a, mounting cylinder) via the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshing with the rotation base driving gear 3614. Rotate in the clockwise direction around the axis of the portion 3571d) (see FIG. 164). At this time, since the back first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back top rotation base unit 3570, the back top rotation base. It does not rotate with unit 3570.

  When the back top rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611b, the back top movable effect unit 3500 is engaged with the center link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third gear. The link gear 3582 rotates while revolving around the central link gear 3611b, and rotates in the clockwise direction with respect to the back upper rotation base 3571, respectively. When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b, and the second drive. The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back upper rotation base 3571, respectively. That is, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the second rotation hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the back upper rotation base 3571 are rotatably attached. The drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 revolve in the clockwise direction around the first hole 3571a, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578. However, they rotate (rotate) in the counterclockwise direction in the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c of the back upper rotation base 3571, respectively.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610. The rotation angle between the back upper rotation base 3571 and the central link gear 3611b is the same as the rotation angle between the back upper rotation base 3571, the second link gear portion 3573b, and the third link gear portion 3578b. When the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated around the central link gear 3611b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 are kept in the central link gear while maintaining their rotation directions constant. Revolves around 3611b (see FIGS. 164 and 165). And since the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are attached to the front surfaces of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, respectively. When the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are kept in the vertical direction of the back top first decorative body unit 3510. It will revolve around.

  In this back movable production unit 3500, when the back top rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 is disposed on the right side of the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top Since the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side of the one decorative body unit 3510, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are placed on the lower side and the upper side of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, respectively, with their upper and lower directions being left as they are (FIG. 165). See). Therefore, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from the top. . In this state, the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are in the closed position, respectively, at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. It is located so as to be longitudinally cut over substantially the entire height in the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 176).

  In a state where the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. 166, the action lever 3586 of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 located at the non-action position is In this state, 3586d is directed upward. In this state, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise by driving the action lever drive motor 3583 and the action lever 3586 is moved upward to move from the non-action position to the action position, The lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 167). As a result, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is locked in the vertical position.

  When the action lever 3586 is moved from the non-action position to the action position in the state where the back rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the action lever 3586 moves upward along with the action lever 3586. The front ends (upper ends) of the first action portion 3586f, the second action portion 3586i, and the third action portion 3586k of 3586 are the receiving bosses of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back first decorative body unit 3510. 3521b, a receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back second decorative body unit 3530, and a lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the back top third decorative body unit 3550, respectively, are contacted from below to perform the first opening / closing. The arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are moved upward.

  Then, when the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 move upward, the first left movable of the back first decorative body unit 3510 that has been in the closed position, respectively. Decorative lens 3511 and first right movable decorative lens 3512, second left movable decorative lens 3531 and second right movable decorative lens 3532 of back second decorative body unit 3530, and third left of back third decorative body unit 3550 The movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are moved outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other to be in the open position (see FIG. 168).

  Accordingly, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back third decorative body unit 3550, and the first in the back first decorative body unit 3510. The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing between the left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative in the back second decorative body unit 3530. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing the lens 3532 is in a state of being aligned in a straight line from top to bottom. In this state, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are in the open position, respectively, at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are arranged in the back front decorative unit 3100. They are lined up and down with substantially the same width so as to be continuous with the back front lower center lens 3131 (see FIG. 177).

  In addition, in order to return the back movable production unit 3500 to the normal state, it can be returned to the normal state by performing an operation reverse to the above.

  In addition, the back upper movable effect unit 3500 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510, and a second left movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit 3530. 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, respectively, in the closed position, respectively. In the state where the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged from left to right, One letter is in a state where a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written horizontally, and the player recognizes the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible. When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is set to a vertical position, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top second decorative body unit 3530 are aligned from top to bottom. The logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is in a vertically written state, and the player can recognize the logo even in this state.

  In this way, according to the back movable stage production unit 3500, the back top rotation base unit 3570 relative to the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550. By the action lever 3586 that moves between the working position and the non-working position according to the general rotational position (horizontal position or vertical position), the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back Different effects can be shown to the player by giving the upper third decorative body unit 3550 different actions of the rotation lock (first action) and the movement to the open position (second action). Can be made difficult to get tired, and the player can be entertained, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

[5-9g. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back bottom movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 169 (a) is a front view of the backside movable effect unit of the back unit, (b) is a rear view of the backside movable effect unit, and (c) is a backside movable decorative body in the backside movable effect unit. It is a rear view which shows the state which raised the unit. Backward movable production unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in back box 3010. The back lower movable effect unit 3700 includes a back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration, and a back surface that is attached to the back box 3010 and moves the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 up and down. A lower drive unit 3750.

  The under back movable decorative body unit 3710 has a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are arranged in the left and right under a roof extending in the left and right directions, and a portion of each gate penetrates back and forth. A main body 3711, a plurality of back lower door members 3712 attached so as to open and close in the form of double doors in front of each gate portion of the back lower decorative body main body 3711, and a back lower door member 3712 The rear lower decorative body base 3713 is attached to the rear side of the back lower decorative body main body 3711 and extends to the left and the rear, and is attached to the front lower portion of the lower lower decorative body base 3713 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction. A lower opening / closing slider 3714 for hinge-rotating the lower back door member 3712 on the left side when viewed from the front in the pair of lower back door members 3712 and a front upper portion of the back lower decorative body base 3713 in the left-right direction Slidably the back under the door member 3712 viewed from the front right side in mounted and are pairwise multiple subplantar door member 3712 comprises a, opening and closing the slider 3715 on which the hinge rotates.

  Further, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body base 3713, and is an opening / closing rotation that slides the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 in mutually different directions. One end side is attached to the upper end of the body 3716 and the opening / closing rotating body 3716 and the other end side is attached to the back lower decorative body base 3713, and each back lower door member via the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715. A door closing spring 3717 that urges the opening / closing rotating body 3716 so that the hinge 3712 rotates in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 urges the opening / closing rotating body 3716 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the back.

  Further, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is disposed on the rear side of the back lower decorative lens 3718 (see FIG. 179) attached to the rear side of the back lower decorative body main body 3712 and the rear lower decorative lens 3718. A backside decorative board 3719 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a wiring cable 3701 that is attached to the rear side of the backside decorative body base 3713 and connects the backside decorative board 3719 and the backside bottom relay board 3757. And an upper wiring cover 3720 capable of guiding. The wiring cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the back and bottom decorative body base 3713 to form a downwardly opened space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. Further, the upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in the rear view.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010, penetrates the front left and right corners when viewed from the front and extends left and right, and shortens upward from the right end. A back lower drive base 3751 having a link slit 3751a extending, and a back surface attached to the front surface of the back lower drive base 3751 so as to be movable up and down and a back lower decorative unit 3710 attached to the upper part. A lower elevating base 3752, a pair of elevating arms 3753 that are rotatably mounted near the left and right ends of the front surface of the back lower drive base 3751 and move the back lower elevating base 3752 up and down, and the rear lower drive base 3751 A back lower drive motor 3754 attached to the side and a pair of lifts by transmitting the rotation of the back lower drive motor 3754 A plurality of transmission gears 3755 to rotate the over arm 3753 directions different from each other, and a.

  Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is slidably mounted at the lower end side in the link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751, and the upper end side is rotatably attached to the opening / closing rotary body 3716 of the back lower decorative body unit 3710. The rod-shaped link arm 3756 is provided. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached to a portion on the right side of the rear view with respect to the rotation center of the opening / closing rotator 3716. Accordingly, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717.

  Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 and relays the connection between the lower back decorative board 3719 and the back lower drive motor 3754 and the lower right relay board 3034. The lower side of the board 3757 and the lower back relay board 3757 on the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 is attached and can guide a wiring cable 3701 connecting the back lower relay board 3757 and the back lower decoration board 3719. A wiring cover 3758. The lower wiring cover 3758 is attached to the back lower drive base 3751 to form an upwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. Further, the lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guiding portion 3758a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in the rear view.

  Next, the operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, the back lower movable effect unit 3700 has the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 in the lowest position (see FIGS. 169 (a) and (b)). In this state, due to the biasing force of the door closing spring 3717, the plurality of back and lower door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotating body 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714, and the upper opening / closing slider 3715, so A plurality of gate doors 3711 (back lower door member 3712) are closed. Moreover, in this state, it is located below the upper end of the part which forms the lower side in the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and is hardly visible from the front (see FIG. 114, etc.).

  In this normal state, when the lower back drive motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of lift arms 3753 so that the respective facing arms 3753 move upward, the back lower lift base 3752 moves upward, The back bottom movable decorative body unit 3710 attached to the elevating base 3752 is raised.

  At this time, since the upper end of the link arm 3756 is attached to the opening / closing rotating body 3716 of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, the link arm 3756 is lifted together with the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, and the lower end side is the lower back. The inside of the link slit 3751a in the drive base 3751 slides upward (leftward in rear view).

  When the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 rises and the lower end side of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a, the link arm 3756 cannot move further upward. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the movement of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 in the vertical direction at this position (first rising position). In this state, the plurality of gate portions of the lower back decorative body main body 3711 are positioned above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center accessory 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. A plurality of gates in the state can be visually recognized (see FIG. 178).

  When the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 is further raised in the state of the first lift position, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a, and the link The opening / closing rotator 3716 to which the upper end side of the arm 3752 is attached rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 169 (c)). When the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in a direction to open the plurality of back / lower door members 3712, thereby The gate stops (the back lower door member 3712) is in an open state and the ascent is stopped. In the state where the back lower door member 3712 is open (second raised position), the back lower decorative lens 3718 arranged on the rear side through the plurality of gates of the lower lower decorative body main body 3711 can be visually recognized (FIG. 179). See). In this state, the open gate can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light from the LED on the back lower decorative substrate 3719.

  In this lower back movable effect unit 3700, a wiring cable 3701 that connects a lower back decorative board 3719 of the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 and a back lower relay board 3757 of the back lower drive unit 3750 includes an upper wiring cover 3720. And a lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 has an upper guiding portion 3720a that is curved between the upper side and the right side in the back view, and the lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guiding portion 3758a that is curved between the lower side and the right side when viewed from the back, and the upper end of the right side extends upward.

  The wiring cable 3701 connecting the back lower decorative board 3719 and the back lower relay board 3757 extends to the right in the rear view at the left end in the rear view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 side. On the back lower drive unit 3750 side, the lower wiring cover is attached so as to extend rightward in the rear view at the left end in the rear view on the lower side of the lower wiring cover. Thereby, in the state of the normal position where the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is lowered most, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extends along the upper guiding portion 3720a and the lower guiding portion 3758a, and is not extremely bent. The back lower decorative board 3719 and the back lower relay board 3757 are connected well (see FIG. 169 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the state where the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is raised, as shown in FIG. The back lower decoration board 3719 and the back lower relay board 3757 are connected in a state of being separated from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side in the back view (lower guide part 3758a). Then, when the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 is lowered from the raised state, it is guided to the upper guiding portion 3720a and the lower guiding portion 3758a, respectively, so that it is smoothly bent without being bent, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower It is housed in the wiring cover 3758. Therefore, even if the backside movable decorative body unit 3710 is repeatedly raised and lowered, the backside movable effect production unit 3700 is extremely different even if the backside movable decorative body unit 3710 is repeatedly raised and lowered. Bending can be prevented, and disconnection of the wiring cable 3701 can be prevented.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 179. FIG. 170 is a front view of the game board showing the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit moved to the appearance position on the center side. FIG. 171 shows that the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position closer to the center, and each first decorative surface is directed forward. FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board shown in FIG. 171, and the second decorative surface is obtained by rotating the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit from the state of FIG. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board shown in a state facing forward, and FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the left and right decorative bodies of the left movable effect unit and the right and left movable effect units are rotated from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the third decorative surface is directed forward.

  FIG. 174 shows the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens in the back first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens in the back second decorative body unit, and the first After the two right movable decorative lenses and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are respectively in the closed position, the first decorative body unit on the back, It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second decorative body unit and the back upper third decorative body unit are moved to the lowered position while keeping the back upper rotation base unit in a horizontal position, FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the back upper rotating base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the state of FIG. 174, and the back first decorative body unit, the back second decorative body unit, and the back top third decorative body unit. Is diagonally 176 is a front view of the game board shown in an open state, and FIG. 176 shows the first decorative body on the back as a vertical position by further rotating the back upper rotating base unit 45 degrees clockwise from the state of FIG. FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board showing the unit, the back second decorative body unit, and the back top third decorative body unit arranged vertically, and FIG. 177 shows the state of the back top first decorative body unit from the state of FIG. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the second decorative body unit on the back, and the third left movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back. The front view of the game board showing the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens in a state where the lens and the third right movable decorative lens are in the open position, respectively. is there.

  FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back bottom movable decoration body unit of the back bottom movable effect production unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascending position, and FIG. 179 is a back bottom movable decoration from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the body unit was further raised and moved to the second raised position.

  In a normal state, the game board 5 is displayed on the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center accessory 2500 as shown in FIGS. Can be seen well from the player side (front). In the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the left and right back center left decorative bodies 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are located at the retracted positions farthest from each other behind the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 in the retracted position. The back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position moved to the leftmost side, and is located behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100 and almost from the front. can not see. In the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back right decorative body 3410 is in the retracted position moved to the rightmost side, and a part of the center right object 2500 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Yes.

  Further, in the normal state, in the back movable production unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 is in the most elevated position, and the back rotation base unit 3570 extends horizontally. It is in a horizontal position. Further, with the back first decorative body unit 3510 in the center, the back second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. Then, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit 3530. 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively a first open / close spring 3523, a second open / close spring 3543, and a third open / close spring 3563. Each is in a closed position in contact with each other by an urging force, and a predetermined character decoration is formed in each. The back upper movable effect unit 3500 has a rear upper third decorative body unit 3550, a back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and a back upper second decorative body unit 3530 arranged in a line from left to right. A predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be shown in horizontal writing with two characters, and the predetermined logo is displayed above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the upper part of the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is visible from the player side (front).

  The game board 5 has a front front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 3100, back middle movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, and lower back movable effect unit 3700 provide predetermined effects (movable effects and light emission effects). Do.

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back middle movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back center left decoration body 3210 and the back center right decoration that are separated from each other by driving of the back center drive motor 3254 are left and right. The body 3220 is moved so as to approach each other, and is moved to a substantially center appearance position (see FIG. 170). As a result, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are positioned substantially at the center of the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body The decoration with 3220 is combined. In this appearance position state, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 block the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and attract the player's interest strongly. In addition to forming a single large decoration (decoration of a cherry blossom petal) by uniting, it makes the player think that there may be something good, and expects the game Can be raised.

  Further, as effects using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left movement drive motor 3352 and the back right of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back right movement drive unit 3450 By driving the movement drive motor 3452, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are moved to the appearance position on the center side in the left-right direction via the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are in a state of a central position close to the left side and the right side in the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. In other words, it is located near the left and right ends of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be seen to surprise the player and attract the player's interest to the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410. Can be made. At this time, the LED on the back left decorative board 3334 and the back right decorative board 3434 is made to emit light, whereby the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be light-decorated, and the player's interest is further attracted. Can be made. In this state, since the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen between the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410, it is possible to entertain the effect collaborated with the effect image.

  Then, with the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 moved to the appearance positions, the back left rotational drive motor and the back right rotational drive motor (not shown) of the back left rotational drive unit 3330 and the back right rotational drive unit 3430 are not shown. Thus, the player can be entertained by rotating the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 around the axis extending vertically. When the rotated back left decorative body 3310 and back right decorative body 3410 are stopped, the first decorative surfaces 3311 and 3411 of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are stopped so as to face forward ( 171), the second decorative surfaces 3312 and 3412 are stopped to face forward (see FIG. 172), or the third decorative surfaces 3313 and 3413 are stopped to face forward (see FIG. 173). )can do. Since the decoration changes depending on the direction in which the rotation of the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 is stopped, it is possible to entertain the player with a decoration that changes, and the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration with a desired decoration. Whether the body 3410 stops or not can be throbbing, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 can be independently moved, only one of them may be moved, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3400 may be moved. When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the decorative surface facing forward may be different. As a result, more various effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be made less tired.

  As an effect using the back movable production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, in the normal position, the back rotation base unit 3570 is set to the horizontal position, and the action lever 3586 is set to the action position. When the up / down drive motor 3654 revolves the up / down drive pin 3652b in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the movable side unit 3610 moves downward along with the revolution of the up / down drive pin 3652b and is attached to the movable side unit 3610. The back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back third decorative body unit 3550 are lowered. When the elevating drive pin 3652b reaches the lowest position and the revolution is stopped, the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top first through the movable side unit 3610. The three decorative body units 3550 are located in the lowered position side by side (horizontal) (see FIG. 174).

  In this state, the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are positioned upward from the vertical center in the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this state, the upper half of the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered. Thus, a predetermined logo formed by the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Because it descends to the center so as to block a part of the displayed effect image, it can make the player think that there is something good and increase the player's expectation of the game Can be made.

  In the state shown in FIG. 174, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise by the action lever drive motor 3583 to move the action lever 3586 from the action position to the non-action position on the right side, The lock piece 3586d inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 is removed from the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is released.

  When the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated counterclockwise by the back surface rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 in a state where the rotation lock of the back rotation base unit 3570 by the action lever 3586 is released, the rotation rotates. Through the rotating base driven gear 3572 meshing with the base driving gear 3614, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 rotates in the clockwise direction around the center link gear 3611b. At this time, since the back first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back top rotation base unit 3570, the back top rotation base. It does not rotate with unit 3570.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 meshing with the central link gear 3611b become the central link gear. 3611b revolves while revolving, and the rotation is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear. The members 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the back upper rotation base 3571, respectively. Therefore, when the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back top second decorative body unit 3530 and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are maintained in a state in which the top and bottom directions are kept constant. Revolve around the body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 175 and 176).

  The rotation of the back-side rotation base unit 3570 causes the back-side second decorative body unit 3530 and the back-side third decorative body unit 3550 to revolve around the back-side first decorative body unit 3510, so Since the upper and lower orientations of the decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are maintained, it is possible to allow the player to fully recognize a predetermined logo with three decorative characters, so You can entertain the movement of changing the logo to a vertical logo.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the horizontal position, the vertical rotation position is reached and the rotation stops. In this state, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from top to bottom (see FIG. 176). Accordingly, the logo formed by the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 is displayed at the center in the frame of the center accessory 2500. Since it seems to cut across the entire height, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and enhance the interest of the player.

  Then, the back rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, and the back top second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged one above the other. In this state, when the action lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise by the action lever drive motor 3583 and the action lever 3586 at the non-action position is moved upward to the action position, the action lever 3586 is moved. The lock piece 3586d is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first attachment shaft member 3525, and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotationally locked in the vertical position.

  When the action lever 3586 moves (rises) from the non-action position to the action position, the tips of the first action part 3586f, the second action part 3586i, and the third action part 3586k of the action lever 3586, respectively. (Upper end) is a receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back first decorative body unit 3510, a receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body. The first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are respectively moved upward by contacting the lower ends of the third opening / closing arms 3561 of the unit 3550 from below. Accordingly, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510 that have been in the closed position, and the second left movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit 3530. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other. Thus, the open position is obtained (see FIG. 177).

  As a result, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and the first left movable decorative so as to cross the left and right center in the game area 5a. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and a second fixed decorative lens facing from between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 3533 and the back front lower center lens 3131 of the back front decoration unit 3100 are aligned in a straight line from top to bottom, giving a strong impact to the player, and attracting the player's attention strongly. It can be attached.

  In this state, the LEDs mounted on the back third decorative substrate 3554, the back first decorative substrate 3514, the back second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front bottom decorative substrate 3134 are appropriately caused to emit light, The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower center lens 3131 are sequentially decorated to emit light, thereby guiding the player's line of sight upward or downward. Can entertain the player. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower center lens 3131 are formed to have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the back front lower center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are used to center the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. Can be shown to the player (see FIG. 181).

  As an effect using the lower back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, for example, when the back lower movable decorative body unit 3710 is moved from the normal state to the first lift position by the back lower drive motor 3754, the back lower decorative body. The main body 3711 is positioned above the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500 and can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. As a result, the back lower decorative body main body 3711 can be seen, which can attract the player's interest strongly (see FIG. 178). In the first lift position, the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body main body 3711 are closed by the plurality of back lower door members 3712.

  When the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 slightly rises from the first lift position to the second lift position, the plurality of back lower door members 3712 are hinged to open the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body main body 3711. (See FIG. 179). By opening the gate (back lower door member 3712), it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game. And in this state, if the LED of the underside decoration board 3719 is made to emit light to decorate the opened gate, the player can be convinced that the chance has arrived, and the player's interest will be further enhanced. Can do.

  As described above, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit 3500, and the lower back It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like using the movable effect unit 3700 as appropriate, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different embodiments in game board]
Next, an embodiment different from the above in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is an example of another embodiment of the game board in which an LED for lighting and decorating the center lens stage and the back front lower center lens of the back front decoration unit is provided on the back movable stage production unit of the back unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows. In the embodiment of FIG. 180, a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a capable of irradiating light downward are provided on the back second decorative board 3534 of the back second decorative body unit 3530 in the back movable effect unit 3500. is there.

  Accordingly, by rotating the back upper rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is positioned at the center of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) or the back front decoration. The upper end of the back front lower center lens 3131 of the unit 3100 is close to the upper end, and in this state, the lower LED 3534a emits light, so that the center of the stage 2530 and the upper part of the back front lower center lens 3131 can be illuminated. . Therefore, even in a portion where a decorative board with LEDs can not be arranged behind, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to decorate the light, which can attract the player's attention strongly. A light emission effect can be performed.

[5-12. Production by door frame and game board]
Next, effects using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 shows the back-side movable base unit in the back unit of the game board with the back-side rotation base unit in the vertical position, and the first left-side movable decorative lens and the first right-side movable lens of the back-side first decorative body unit. A decorative lens, a second left movable decorative lens and a second right movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit, and a third left movable decorative lens and a third right movable decorative lens of the back third decorative body unit, respectively. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state where each of the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens is visible as an open position state.

  As an effect by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there is an effect using the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 and the back movable movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back movable production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the back rotation base unit 3570 is moved to the vertical position with the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting unit 3600 moved to the lowered position. And the action lever 3586 is moved from the non-action position to the action position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back first decorative body unit, and the back second decorative body unit. The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the third decorative body unit on the back are respectively set in the open position.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 181, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back formed at substantially the same width at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1. The front lower center lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are arranged from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. In this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 and the first fixed decorative member are formed by the back third decorative substrate 3554, the back first decorative substrate 3514, the back second decorative substrate 3534, and the back front lower decorative substrate 3134. The lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back front lower center lens 3131 are sequentially decorated with light emission from above, so that the player's line of sight can be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3. And can enjoy the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, and also operate the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 to surely enjoy the player participation type effect. I can do it.

[6. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the movable side unit 3610 (movable side base 3611) of the back up / down lifting unit 3600 in the back top movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is used in the game area. 5a is positioned at an upper position away from the center of the front view, and the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 rotatably attached to the movable side base 3611 is positioned in a horizontal position. The back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 provided on the front surface of 3570 are visible in a state where they are arranged in the left-right direction. ing. At this time, in the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550, a pair of first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first One right movable decorative lens 3512, a second left movable decorative lens 3531, a second right movable decorative lens 3532, a third left movable decorative lens 3551, and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 are respectively provided with a first opening / closing spring 3523, a first movable movable decorative lens 3552, and a third left movable decorative lens 3552. Since the two open / close springs 3543 and the third open / close spring 3563 are positioned at the closed position, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit. 3550, a first fixed decorative lens 3513, a second fixed decorative lens 3533, and a third fixed decorative lens 3553 are connected to a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and The first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are hidden invisible. It has become. Therefore, in each back first decorative body unit 3510, back second decorative body unit 3530, and back third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable in the closed position state. Only a predetermined logo decoration with characters formed by the decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 is provided. You can entertain the player.

  Then, when the movable unit 3610 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 attached to the movable side unit 3610, the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body. Since the unit 3530 and the back third decorative body unit 3550 are close to the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top The third decorative body unit 3550 can be conspicuous, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550. be able to.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the raised position or moved from the raised position to the lowered position, the action lever 3586 is moved along the back upper rotation base 3571 in the back upper rotation base unit 3570 from the non-action position to the action position above. When the first lever is applied to the action lever 3586 on each back first decorative body unit 3510, back second decorative body unit 3530, and back third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first The relative rotation of the decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back third decorative body unit 3550 and the back top rotation base unit 3570 is restricted (locked), and vibration or inertial force is caused. Etc., the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are shaken. It can be prevented from moving or moving, and the decoration of the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 can be pleasing and entertaining. it can.

  While the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is moved to the lowered position and the action lever 3586 is moved to the non-action position, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction to move from the horizontal position. When rotationally moved to the vertical position, the backside second decorative body unit 3530 and the backside third decorative body unit 3550 provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the backside rotation base unit 3570 are maintained in the vertical direction. While rotating relatively with respect to the back upper rotation base unit 3570 and revolving around the back first decorative body unit 3510, they are arranged in a vertical direction different from that in the horizontal position. The first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged to change their direction. It is possible to entertain show in person.

  In a state where the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, the action lever 3586 is moved upward along the back upper rotation base 3571 from the non-action position to the action position, and each back first decorative body unit 3510 is moved. When the second action is applied to the back second decorative body unit 3530 and the back third decorative body unit 3550, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top In the third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the first openable spring 3523, the second open / close spring 3543, and the third open / close spring 3563 are resisted against the biasing force of the third open / close spring 3563. Second left movable decorative lens 3531 and second right movable decorative lens 3532, third left movable decorative lens 3551 and third right movable decorative lens 3552 are closed. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, Since the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are visible from between the third right movable decorative lens 3552, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 and the second fixed decorative lens. 3533 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be seen to make the player think that there is something good, and to the player the first left movable decorative lens 3511. And the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable The decoration lens 3551 and the third right movable decoration lens 3552 are opened, and a premium feeling is imparted to an effect in which the first fixed decoration lens 3513, the second fixed decoration lens 3533, and the third fixed decoration lens 3553 are visible. This can increase the player's expectation for the game.

  Therefore, depending on the relative rotational position (horizontal position or vertical position) of the back surface rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the back surface first decorative body unit 3510, the back surface second decorative body unit 3530, and the back surface third decorative body unit 3550. The operation lever 3586 that moves between the operation position and the non-operation position is rotationally locked to the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550. Different effects can be shown to the player by acting differently (one action) and moving to the open position (second action), and various effects can make the player hard to get bored, It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, as described above, from the normal state, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first first decorative body unit 3510, the second upper decorative body unit 3530, and the third upper decorative body unit 3550 on the back. The right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move to the open position and are fixed first. Since there are multi-stage movements (effects) before the decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 become visible, whether or not to move to the next stage in each stage. The player can be thrilled and excited by the player, so that the player can see the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back Third decorative body unit 3550 series of moves by (directed) can entertain, a reduction in the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and moved between the horizontal position and the vertical position. 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 change the orientation of the back upper rotation base unit 3570. The direction of the operating lever 3586 is also different from the one decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position. In the horizontal position and the vertical position, the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, Direction acting on the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 (direction) becomes different. Accordingly, since the first action and the second action act in different directions at the horizontal position and the vertical position, the back first decorative body unit 3510 and the back top second decorative body by the first action and the second action. Since the action exerted on the unit 3530 and the third decorative body unit 3550 on the back side can be easily made different, as described above, the first action to lock the rotation and the second action to move to the open position act. It is possible to make the mechanism to be configured relatively simple, and to easily implement the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects.

  Further, since the action lever 3586 is linearly moved (slid) along the rear upper rotation base 3571 of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 between the non-action position and the action position, the action lever 3586 is rotated. The distance between the non-operating position and the operating position can be easily increased as compared with the case where the operating lever 3586 is operated, and the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and A sufficient effect can be exerted on the back third decorative body unit 3550 to facilitate a desired effect.

  In the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left A movable decorative lens 3531, a second right movable decorative lens 3532, a third left movable decorative lens 3551, and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 are connected to a first opening spring 3523, a second opening spring 3543, and a third opening spring 3563. The back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550 are moved or vibrated. Unintentionally, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable The decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move to the open position, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. Can be prevented from being visible. Thus, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first only when the second action is exerted on the back first decorative body unit 3510, the back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back top third decorative body unit 3550. The first movable decorative lens 3513 is moved by moving the right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. The second fixed decorative lens 3533 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be made visible, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be made visible. The production effect can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, the back side first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotating base unit 3570 are moved by the movable side unit 3610 from the front side of the game area 5a. Since it can be moved to a lowered position close to the center, the back top first decorative body unit 3510, the back top second decorative body unit 3530, the back top third decorative body unit 3550, and the back top rotating base unit 3570 are moved down. When moved to the position, it becomes easy to secure a space for rotating the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotation base unit 3570. Since the range of movement of the backside rotating base unit 3570 that rotates between the two can be increased, the backside second decoration Surprised player by unit 3530 and the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 revolves largely can entertain more, the lowering of interest on the game player's can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the back movable production unit 3500, when the back rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the action exerted by the action lever 3586 by moving from the non-action position to the action position (second action). ), The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back first decorative body unit 3510, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back second decorative body unit 3530. Although the lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back third decorative body unit 3550 are shown to be moved from the closed position to the open position, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, for example, they can be moved from the open position to the closed position, or the back first decorative body unit 3510, Two decorative body unit 3530, and the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 may be or so as to rotate around an axis extending in front and rear.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 187. FIG. 182 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 183 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 182, and FIG. 184 is the payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 182, and FIG. FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 187 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 951, the power supply board 931, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 182, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are input to the main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor and detection signals from various detection switches. Main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a stop.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. A hard random number circuit 1310an ”). The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the process is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the main control system reset described later, and thus the information is output to the information. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  114, a first start port sensor 3112 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3111 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. 114, a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 2003, a first grand prize port sensor 4005 that detects a game ball that has entered the first grand prize port 2005, and a second grand prize. A detection signal from a second big prize opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball that has entered the mouth 2006 and a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. These are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 3032 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the start port solenoid 2107, the first attacker solenoid 2108, the second attacker solenoid 2109, and the sorting solenoid 2110 via the panel relay board 3032 from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d. Or a relay signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, so that the panel relay board 3032 and Via the function display unit 1400, a first special symbol display 1403, a second special symbol display 1405, a first special reservation number display 1404, a second special reservation number display 1406, a normal symbol display 1402, a status display. 1401 and a round display 1407.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information about the game (game information) to the board 951, or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 2401, the first big prize port sensor 4005, the second big prize port sensor 2402, the first reception port sensor 2434, and the first. The non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the second receiving sensor 2435, while the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3111. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened, and game balls frequently enter, and the second big prize opening 2006 is entered. Since the game balls that have been balled are distributed to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432, the first big winning port sensor 4005, the second big winning port sensor 2402, the first receiving port sensor 2434, and the second receiving port. Detection of game balls by the entrance sensor 2435 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are also used for the first grand prize port sensor 4005, the second big prize port sensor 2402, the first reception port sensor 2434, and the second reception port sensor 2435. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3111 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switch is used for the general prize opening sensor 3111.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, and the like connects the bus 1310ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 133). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (see FIG. 133). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 129). With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this occurs, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 183, the payout control board 951 that controls payout of game balls, etc., displays a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that also functions in various ways, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 An error LED display 860b. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 183, the payout control unit 952 for performing various controls relating to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU952a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a drive signal to be output to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. For exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit 6. It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a so that various information (game information) related to games and various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 are serially received as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs with respect to the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset described later, and thus the various signals based on the information The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. In contrast, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function includes the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like, and is not reset by a payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  Out-of-game detection sensor 827 for detecting the out-of-game ball in the supply path of the in-ball supply unit 820 of the out-of-payment unit 800 and out-of-game detection sensor 842 for detecting the out-of-game ball released from the out-out outlets 831b and 832b of the out-pay device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 for the sake of explanation.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 952b. To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection of the operation switch 954). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

Also, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, thereby providing the payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED By outputting a drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 is output via a resistor (not shown).

Also, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 that advances the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the lending device connection terminal board for game balls etc. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the sphere rental return display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball rental return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 129) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 952a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 184, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The ball is supplied to the payout control board 951 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and is supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball lending return display unit 330 that is a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the lending unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system that sequentially drives each one-digit segment indicator. The digit segment display is controlled to turn on. By such lighting control, the ball rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the LED, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has started or ended, to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like of the hall is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a single payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. Power factor improving circuit 935b, smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improving circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and outputs the adjusted game current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 185, the peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. The peripheral controller 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, and the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, while the speaker 921 and the upper speaker A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sound such as music and sound effects that flow from 573, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) that holds calendar information that specifies date and time information and time information that specifies hour, minute, and second The volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the control unit 4165, the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is turned through the knob unit. Operation and a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. The signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is electrically connected. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and its own system runs away using both peripheral control built-in WDT and peripheral control external WDT 1511e. It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a that is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 186, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral control various serial I. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading data from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I. / O port 1511ag and a dedicated controller for independently transferring data between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like without using the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab reads / writes from / to the storage device via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to transfer data independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes a lamp drive board serial I / O port, a motor drive board serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages.
Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. A track number for instructing which of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or copied to various control program copy areas in the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to light up.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 186, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Control data copy area 1511cd for storing a copy of various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b Control data copy area 1511ce for storing a copy of the information, and backup non-management for storing information not updated as a backup among various information updated by executing various control programs A target work area 1511cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a gaming state (for example, an instruction to start an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 182 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. Yes, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, when the presentation display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  In addition, Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is added to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs as production backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 143). Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 182 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”) and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. Sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a and various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, and serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c to be transmitted toward the decoration drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the serialized drawing data to the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial data output from door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of device 460 and transmitted toward effect display drive board 4450 housed in dish unit 320, and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e And the signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f for circuit connection. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae and has a built-in sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display which is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 as described above, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short by being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the peripheral data as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d uses “V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
In contrast to the serial interface differential interface (Signaling), the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmission) is performed, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer method”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, as shown in FIG. 187, stores music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode (to be described later) by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified to the master volume value when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the synthesized volume of the effect sound is actually set to the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the use Volume adjustment buttons set as sub-volume values to adjust the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be played The volume of the combined notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by combining the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the knob 1510a. It amplifies to the master volume value, serializes the amplified notification sound, and outputs it to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control for playing the notification sound in order to notify the clerk or the like of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is briefly described. To explain, first, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound Is synthesized with the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound is actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized to obtain an audio data. And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as data.

  That is, as for the sound that actually flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the predetermined period elapses, the notification sound is forcibly set to mute until now. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to be rotated (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed). If the adjustment is made by moving to the setting mode by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the adjusted volume is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound) and flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows in order to inform the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal action against the pachinko machine 1, Although the sound volume is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound that has been muted proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data. When it stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 187, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 187, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Each of the green video signal and the blue video signal is composed of 8 bits and a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, and therefore the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals such as a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals such as a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The signal and the three synchronization signals, the clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Also, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to the game ball It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, and this differential 1-pair cable is composed of two wires. Is not a parallel line provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if it is a mechanism that is difficult to be affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., it is only due to electrostatic discharge of a game ball with such a hardware configuration. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., an effect display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when it is received by the shiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data to be received is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being disturbed different from the normal one. In the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sand storm-like image is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In the transmitter IC1512d for production, the differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make it difficult to be affected by noise, and in addition to such hardware configuration Even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when receiving by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the operation of attaching the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the receiver cancels (removes) the noise. The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the route from the transmitter to the receiver spans a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is used. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, each is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power is red and the other multiple wirings are gray. . Note that the power supply wiring may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when receiving a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  When receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal to be described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the input LOCKN signal, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, generates an image for informing that effect by controlling sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputs it to game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Via the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. 320, it can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in 320, but there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a defect has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. ”) In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured with the RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the game board side effect is provided. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date / time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the year / month / day. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time are specified, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. Yes. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game, the state is continued for a predetermined time, and when the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly demonstrationd (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game this time will have the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the like. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are moved by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, that is, A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that is thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open to the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is released forward. When a game ball enters the chance entrance 2535 in the center of the stage 2530 and is released into the game area 5a from the chance exit 2536, the chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first start opening 2002, so there is a high probability. The first start port 2002 is received. When a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center object 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2400, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility of being accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 or the like of the state.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side slope 2300, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 There is a possibility that the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is received. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Immediately below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, a gate passage 2420 provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and a game ball enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability. To do.

  When the right-handed game ball enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. The second start port 2411 that closes the start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain amount of time is set after the normal lottery is started until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal variation time, the more the game balls for which “normal hit” is drawn in the gate unit 2003 can be received at the second start port 2004.

  If the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and before the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the result of the previous normal lottery ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without holding even if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “per time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). The special lottery results that are drawn by receiving the game balls at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “big hit A (5R)”, “big hit B (5R)”, “Big hit C (15R)”, etc.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special variation time, the first grand prize winning opening 2005 and the second big winning prize opening 2006 are in a state where the game balls can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big prize opening 2005 when the first big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen pieces) from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. ) Game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321. On the other hand, when a game ball is received in the second big prize opening 2006 when the second big prize opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of games from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. The ball is paid out to the upper plate 321. Accordingly, when the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second grand prize opening 2006 are able to accept game balls, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 accepts the game balls, thereby increasing the number of games. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, a big hit gaming state in which a predetermined round is generated multiple times occurs. In the big hit gaming state of the present embodiment, the first big prize opening 2005 or the second one according to the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern having one time opening / closing or opening / closing pattern having multiple times opening / closing) that allows the game ball to be received / opened. A round in which the two big prize opening 2006 operates is executed a plurality of times. In this example, the opening / closing patterns corresponding to some rounds of the opening / closing patterns of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 operated in each round are different from the opening / closing patterns corresponding to other rounds. Opening and closing patterns that open and close the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 only once in one round, and the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 multiple times in one round And the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the jackpot (big hit B (5R), big hit C (15R)) that performs both, and opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 that is operated in each round A big hit that all patterns are the same (open / close pattern that opens / closes the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 only once per round is executed) Ri and A (5R))), it is prepared.

  In the “big hit”, when the second big prize opening 2006 is open due to the big hit gaming state, the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2006 are distributed to the second receiving opening 2432 by the sorting piece 2433. After the jackpot game state ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “big hit” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed ( )).

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested by the acceptance of the game balls. When a game ball is accepted at the second start opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. The The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a final image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state A, jackpot gaming state B, jackpot gaming state C, etc.) according to the lottery special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol string varies). The time until the fixed image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, back center movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500 , And the under-bottom movable production unit 3700, etc. can be used as appropriate to produce a light emission production, a movable production, a display production, etc., and the player can be entertained by various productions. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

[9. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 188 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first processed as a process in step S1 on the condition that an operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize data stored in various registers and RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 1310a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut down, information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach by the variable random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the display, the decorative symbol variable display executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the special symbol variable display (Left decorative design and right decorative design are stopped in the same design and the middle decorative design is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative designs are all displayed in the same design. Reach random numbers used in lottery processing for determining whether or not to win, symbol random numbers used in lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the special random number ( A random number counter for holding random numbers such as one random number, second random number), a random number used in a lottery process (ordinary random number), etc., for winning a win that triggers the operation of the second start door 2411 Yes.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 188 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 4004, the first big prize port sensor 4005, the second big prize port sensor 2402, the first Detection signals from various switches such as the reception port sensor 2434, the second reception port sensor 2435, and the general prize port sensor 3111 are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process for winning a win as an operation trigger of the second start door 2411 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second start port door 2411 becomes higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state. (So-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is shortened, and the normal symbol lottery is selected. When the result is successful, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the second start door 2411.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next performs, for example, the hit information (big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R), big hit C (15R) supplied to the hall management computer as the processing of step S18. ) And other information output processing is performed.

  Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 4004, the first big prize port sensor 4005, and the second large size. When detection signals such as the prize opening sensor 2402 and the general prize opening sensor 3111 are on, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 951 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the start memory number as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S39) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode that suggests "big hit A (5R)" In addition, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to open and close in a manner corresponding to the big hit gaming state A, and the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2006 are sent to the first entrance 2431 or the second The distribution pieces 2433 to be distributed to either of the two receiving ports 2432 are driven and controlled, and further, a process of setting to a special state or a non-special state when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened is executed. In addition, when it comes to a mode that suggests “big hit B (5R)”, the first big winning port 2005 and the second big winning port 2006 are controlled to open and close in a mode corresponding to the big hit gaming state B, and the second big win The distribution piece 2433 that distributes the game balls received at the winning opening 2006 to either the first receiving opening 2431 or the second receiving opening 2432 is driven and controlled, and when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened, a special state or non-special A process for setting one of the states is executed. In addition, when it comes to a mode that suggests “big hit C (15R)”, the first big winning port 2005 and the second big winning port 2006 are controlled to open and close in a mode corresponding to the big hit gaming state C, and the second big win The distribution piece 2433 that distributes the game balls received at the winning opening 2006 to either the first receiving opening 2431 or the second receiving opening 2432 is driven and controlled, and when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened, a special state or non-special A process for setting one of the states is executed.

  Here, the “special state” and the “non-special state” will be described. First, in the present embodiment, there are two states of “special state” and “non-special state” when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432. Here, the “special state” is a state in which it is allowed (validated) to be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is completed by accepting a game ball at the second receiving port 2432. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the “special state”, the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the “non-special state” is a state where even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it is not permitted (invalidated) to be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state. Therefore, even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the “non-special state”, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. In the “non-special state”, even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished, but the second receiving port 2432 in the big hit gaming state. In order to make it possible to execute an effect based on the fact that the game ball is received, the period for monitoring whether or not the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 is set. Further, in the present embodiment, the “invalid state” different from the “special state” and the “non-special state” is provided as a state in which the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432. Here, the “invalid state” is a state in which a game ball is not accepted by the second receiving port 2432 in principle, such as a round in which the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened. Is accepted (invalidated) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is not allowed to be controlled to a high probability state. Therefore, even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the “invalid state”, the high probability state is not controlled after the big hit game state is ended. In addition, the “invalid state” is to enable the hall management side to be notified of information regarding the occurrence of an abnormality when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 due to an abnormality such as an illegal act. In addition, a period in which whether or not a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 is monitored.

  In the big hit control process (step S41), after the opening control of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 is performed, each set process of the high probability flag, the short time flag, and the short time counter is executed. . The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. If a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 during the special state during execution of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R), big hit C (15R)) The high probability flag is set because the high probability state (high probability short time state) is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished, but when the game ball is not accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state (non- In a case where a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 during the special state), the high probability flag is not set because the high probability state (high probability short-time state) is not controlled after the big hit gaming state. If the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the hour / hour counter becomes “0” or The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time-short state is in effect, and the big hits (big hit A (5R), big hit B ( 5R), the jackpot gaming state based on jackpot C (15R)) is set to end. The time-short flag is the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) when the next big hit or the counter value of the time-count counter becomes “0”. Reset by processing.

  The short-time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the short-time state continues. The short-time state (high probability) When the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R), big hit C (15R)) to be controlled to the short time state, low probability short time state, the number of times the short state continues The time-count counter is set down every time the special symbol fluctuation display is executed until the counter value reaches “0”, but before the counter value becomes “0”, When it is a big hit, it is reset by a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 126 described later or a second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S36), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3112 is in an ON state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S44, each random number thus obtained is used as the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2593 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the second special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is used as the processing in step S54. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S37). The first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display unit 1403 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 188).

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 193, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. As a process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in each storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability state shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 195A is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 195 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) and short time state (low probability short time state)). And a jackpot determination table at a high probability and used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability short time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, it is coincident with the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number is won, and the 299 types of first special random numbers are determined to be out of place. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process, the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. In the same manner as the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to in order to match the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot, 299 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that (a jackpot probability at a low probability: 1/300).

  Moreover, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 10 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability coincide with the jackpot determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that 290 types of first special random numbers coincide with the loss determination value (high probability of big hit: 1/30). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time short state)) and short time state (low) It is increased to 10 times the probability short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process, the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. 10 kinds of second special random numbers including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, like the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating winning and match with the loss determination values indicating that the 290 kinds of second special random numbers are out of place (when the probability is high) Jackpot probability: 1/30).

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that they are out of place, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). As a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S102, if it is determined that the reach is shifted (step S118), a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set. The process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 196, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 195 (B). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be the off symbol as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped (step S124).

  As shown in FIG. 195 (B), the symbol determination table includes symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol) for each determination result (big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R), big hit C (15R)). Random number) is stored in an associated form. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. The first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to open and close in a manner corresponding to the big hit gaming state A, and the first big prize opening 2005 is set corresponding to each round from 1 to 4 rounds. Opened once based on the first opening mode (opening for a period (short period) in which about 3 game balls can enter. For example, 3 seconds). 2006 is released based on the second release mode (opening over a period (long term) in which a specified maximum number of winning game balls can enter, for example, 20 seconds), and the second round in the second round. When the big prize opening 2006 is opened based on the second opening mode, it is set to a special state (a state in which a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). And the second entrance during special conditions If the game ball is accepted in 432, the high probability short-time state is controlled until the variation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the big hit gaming state is finished, If the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed 50 times after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Big hit A (5R) that controls to short state at low probability
2. The first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to open and close in a manner corresponding to the big hit gaming state B. In the first round, the first big prize opening 2005 is first opened four times. Opened based on the form (opening over a period (short period) in which about 3 game balls can enter. For example, 3 seconds), and the second grand prize opening 2006 is only once in the second round. Opening based on two opening modes (opening over a period (long term) in which a specified maximum number of winning game balls can enter, for example, 20 seconds), and one second opening mode When the game is opened at the second round, it is set to a non-special state (a state in which even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it will not be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit game state is finished), the first in the third round Opening the third prize opening 2005 twice (Open for a period (medium period) in which about 6 to 7 game balls can be entered. For example, 6 seconds), and the first big prize opening 2005 is made once in the fourth round. Only the third opening mode (opening over a period (medium period) in which about 6 to 7 game balls can enter, for example, 6 seconds), and the second big prize opening in the fifth round 2006 is released once based on the second opening mode (opening over a period (long term) in which a specified maximum number of winning game balls can enter, for example, 20 seconds) and once Is set to a special state (a state in which a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) when being opened in the second opening mode. When a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 Controls the high probability short time until the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) change display is executed 100 times after the big hit gaming state ends, If the game ball is not accepted, the jackpot B (which is controlled to a low probability short-time state until the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed 50 times after the jackpot gaming state is ended. 5R)
3. The first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to open and close in a manner corresponding to the big hit gaming state C, and the first big prize opening 2005 is first opened four times in the first round. Opened based on the mode (opening over a period (short period) in which about 3 game balls can enter. For example, 3 seconds), and the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the second round. (Open for a long period of time that allows the maximum number of game balls to be specified to be entered (long term), for example, 20 seconds). Opened based on the third release mode (opening over a period (medium period) in which about 6 to 7 game balls can enter, for example, 6 seconds), and the first in round 4 3rd opening mode (only 6-7 game balls can enter) Opening over a period (medium period) such as 6 seconds, for example, and in the fifth round, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened only once in the second opening mode (the maximum number of winnings specified) A special state (second receiving port 2432) when the game ball is opened on the basis of a period (long term) in which the game ball can enter (for example, 20 seconds) and is released in the second second release mode. When the game ball is accepted, the game state is set to a high probability state after the jackpot game state is finished), and the first grand prize opening 2005 is set to 1 corresponding to each round from the 6th to the 14th round. Opened based on the second opening mode (opening over a period (long term) in which the specified maximum number of winning game balls can enter, for example, 20 seconds). First prize opening 2006 only once Opening based on the opening mode (opening over a period (long term) in which the specified maximum number of winning game balls can enter, for example, 20 seconds) When opening, it is set to a non-special state (a state in which even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it will not be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit game state is finished) When a game ball is received at the entrance 2432, the high probability time-short state is controlled until the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the big hit gaming state. When the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed 50 times after the big hit game state is finished. Low accuracy Big hit C (15R) that controls to a short time rate
The jackpot is determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value allocation is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, of the big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R), and big hit C (15R), the player Big hit C (15R), which is relatively advantageous to the game (in addition to the high probability that a game ball will be received by the second receiving port 2432 during the special state, and the high probability state after the big hit game state is finished) Big hits A (5R) and big hits B (5R), which are relatively unfavorable to the player (the second prize received during the special state), while the judgment values are not assigned to the big hits with the largest possible amount of winning balls Although there is a high probability that a game ball will be accepted at the entrance 2432 and there is a high probability of controlling to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state, the amount of winning ball that can be obtained is a big hit less than the big hit C (15R)) 50 Distribution of the judgment value is set. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, of the big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R), and big hit C (15R), for the big hit C (15R) which is relatively advantageous to the player 10 decision values are assigned, 30 decision values are assigned to the big hit A (5R), which is relatively unfavorable to the player, and 60 pieces are assigned to the big hit B (5R). The judgment value distribution is set.

  Thus, when the big hit on the first special symbol side, it is determined to be either big hit A (5R) or big hit B (5R) which is relatively unfavorable to the player. In order to determine one of the relatively unfavorable big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R) and the big hit C (15R) which is relatively advantageous to the player, the second special symbol side is more than the first special symbol side. A highly advantageous game can be realized. In addition, in the short time state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, a game on the second special symbol side (a game that allows a game ball to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed. At the time of the big hit on the side, it is decided to one of big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R) and big hit C (15R), so only the amount of prize ball that can be obtained at the time of consecutive resorts It can be noticed.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the big hit A (5R) is determined, the big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the big hit B (5R) is determined, the big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol B. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the big hit A (5R) is determined, the big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the big hit B (5R) is determined, the big hit symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. When the symbol B is determined and the jackpot C (15R) is determined, the jackpot symbol C is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, these lottery results (indicating either the type of jackpot, the reach out of the reach, or the off (the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that it may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S126, this process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the left / middle / right decoration symbol variation display based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays the left decoration symbol → right decoration symbol → middle decoration symbol in this order. Thus, the display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the big hit among the big hits related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When A (5R) is specified, it is determined to be a big hit A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when big hit B (5R) is specified, it is determined to be a big hit B symbol (common with the big hit A symbol) When the big hit C (15R) is specified, it is determined as the big hit C symbol (common with the big hit A symbol and the big hit B symbol), and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach production) Display control of the determined stop symbol on the effect display device 1600 is performed. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped variably in any of the big hit A symbol, the big hit B symbol, or the big hit symbol C, it is determined that the decorative symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. However, since a common symbol is used as the jackpot A symbol, jackpot B symbol, and jackpot C symbol, any one of jackpot A (5R), jackpot B (5R), jackpot C (15R) Cannot be determined.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, when the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol with a reach is separated. (The combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs are the same.) If the outlier is specified, it is a detachable design that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 197, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the big hit flag set. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S142). ) If the reach flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are set. If it is not done, that is, it will be a normal deviation (out of reach performance is not executed) Expediently, it selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S145).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S148). As a result, effect control is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the effect display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. At the time of updating, this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is associated with the special symbol random time information set to about 1 second when the time is short. When the time is short, the variation pattern of the special symbol is set such that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected at the time reduction is compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-time reduction so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. Symbol variation time information is set.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly executes step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 199, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol indicator 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time-shortage counter is set to “0” while the time-shortage flag is set and the time-short state continuation count is set. (Step S183). If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S184), and then it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S185). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, the time reduction flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S186). If it is determined in the process of step S183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S185 that the time reduction counter is not “0”. At that time, the process proceeds to step S187.

  When the jackpot flag is set (step S187), a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started is set (step S188), and the jackpot gaming state is started (the jackpot round start command is set). The waiting time (a period during which display indicating that the big hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S189). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is further set. If it is not “0”, the counter value is reset (returned to “0”), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S190), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S191), this process is terminated.

  The big hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the big hit type (big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R), big hit C (15R)). . In step S188, a big hit start command (big hit A (5R) start command, big hit B (5R) start command, big hit C (15R) start command) corresponding to the type of big hit is set. Thereby, the presentation according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S39).

  In step S189, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. However, in the processing of step S401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, and also when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, the special state (second receiving prize). When the game ball is received at the entrance 2432, the game state is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) or in a non-special state (even if the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, Set to one of the states that will not be controlled to a high probability state after completion), and the second acceptance during the special state A prize winning opening / closing process (step S402) for monitoring whether or not a game ball has been received in 2432, and a distribution in which the game balls accepted in the second prize winning opening 2006 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2432. The second receiving opening / closing process (step S403) for controlling the driving of the piece 2433 is executed in order.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening / closing process (step S402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S411 that the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a performs a predetermined time (for example, from the open state of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 according to the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, which will be described later. , 3 seconds in the first release mode, 20 seconds in the second release mode, 6 seconds in the third release mode) (step S412), or during the first round When the number of game balls won in the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 reaches the maximum number (for example, 9) (step S413), it is released. It said first state winning opening 2005 or controlled in the closed state the second special winning opening 2006 (step S414). When it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 to the closed state (step S415), it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When a jackpot round end command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds is set as a command (step S416), this processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S411 that the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in a closed state, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a has a timing for opening the first big prize port 2005 or the second big prize port 2006 according to the operation schedule of the first big prize port 2005 and the second big prize port 2006, which will be described later. (Step S417), when it is determined to start a new round by controlling the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 (step S418), the peripheral control board The jackpot round start frame corresponding to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds as a command sent to 1510 To set the de (step S419). When it is determined that it is time to set the special status flag or the non-special status flag, that is, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened (step S420), a second receiving port described later. According to the state setting schedule of 2432, a special state flag or a non-special state flag is set (step S421). Note that it is not necessary to reset the special state flag when the special state flag is already set, and similarly, there is no need to reset the non-special state flag when the non-special state flag is already set. . Then, when the closed first closed winning opening 2005 or the second closed winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state (step S422), this process is terminated. When it is determined that a new round will not be started (such as the second opening within the same round) by controlling the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 to the open state. (Step S419), or when it is determined that it is time to set the special state flag or the non-special state flag (when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened) (Step S420), the closed state When the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state (step S422), this process is terminated. Thus, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute an effect in accordance with the type of jackpot designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command and the current number of rounds.

  Note that the special state flag indicates a state set to a special state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). The non-special state flag is a state set to a non-special state (a state in which even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, the state is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). It is a flag indicating that When the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, the game balls received by the second big prize opening 2006 in the second acceptance opening / closing process (step S403) to be described later are either the first reception opening 2431 or the second reception opening 2432. By controlling the distribution pieces 2433 to be distributed, the game balls can be received at the second receiving port 2432 and set to either a special state or a non-special state.

  If it is determined in step S417 that it is not time to open the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006, as shown in FIG. When the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 finishes all rounds by repeating the open state and the closed state of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 (step S423), the big hit is being executed. The flag is reset and a jackpot end command is set (step S424). The jackpot end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the jackpot end command is received by the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 provides an effect related to ending the jackpot gaming state or the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished. , Lamp, LED, speaker, etc. If it is determined that a second reception pass flag to be described later is set (step S425), the high probability flag is set and the second reception pass flag is reset (step S426). When the flag is set and an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the count of the time-saving state in the counter value of the time-saving counter (step S427), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the second reception pass flag is not set (step S425), the high-probability flag is not set, the time-short flag is set, and the time-saving state is set to the counter value of the time-count counter. When an initial value (for example, 50 times) is set as the number of times to continue (step S427), this process is terminated. As described above, when it is determined that the second acceptance passage flag is set (the game ball is accepted by the second acceptance port 2432 during the special state), the high probability flag and the short time flag are set. If it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball is not accepted by the second entrance 2432 during the special state), the time reduction flag is controlled. Set only and control to short state at low probability.

  FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second receiving opening / closing process (step S403).

  If it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2432 is in an open state (a state in which game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432 by the sorting piece 2433), FIG. As shown, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 passes a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the open state of the second receiving port 2432 according to the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 described later. (Step S423) Or when the second round winning opening 2006 is controlled to be closed to end the current round (Step S433), the opened second receiving port 2432 is closed (sorting piece). 2433 is controlled so that game balls are distributed to the first receiving port 2431 side (step S434).

  If it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2432 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the vibration described later. In accordance with the operation schedule of the segment 2433, when it is time to open the second receiving port 2432 (step S435), the closed second receiving port 2432 is controlled to open (step S436).

  Next, if it is determined in step S437 that a game ball has been received in the opened second receiving port 2432, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 Whether the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state during the special state flag setting (step S438), or when the second special state flag is set during the non-special state while the non-special state flag is set. It is determined whether or not a game ball is received at the receiving port 2432 (step S442). If it is determined that the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state (step S438), it is determined that the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state. When the second receiving port passing flag shown is not set (step S439), the second receiving port passing flag is set (step S440), and the second receiving port passing command A is transmitted as a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Is set (step S441), the process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 during the non-special state (step S442), the second receiving port passing command B is set as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At this point (step S443), this process ends. As a result, an effect corresponding to whether the game ball is received by the second receiving port 2432 in the special state or the non-special state instructed by the second receiving port passing command A or the second receiving port passing command B Can be executed by the effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process (step S15).

  If it is determined in step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the normal symbol variation display on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol variation display so that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the game (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode suggesting “per symbol”, the second start port door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of the ball (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 188).

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in an on state and a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 205, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbols of the normal symbol stored in the storage areas of the normal reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a short time state (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) (step S826), the short time normal figure hit judgment table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state) (step S825), a non-time-short normal figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S825). In step S827, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the normal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is short time (low probability short time state, high probability short time state), A non-time / short-time ordinary figure determination table used when the gaming state is non-time / short-time (low probability non-time / short-time state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball passes to the gate portion 2003 in the time reduction, the player always wins by the usual figure, and the second start opening door 2411 rotates to reach the second start opening 2004. The game ball is controlled to be received.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving common figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all the 251 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the common figure determination values indicating that each common figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, in the non-time saving state, even if a game ball passes to the gate portion 2003, the second start port door 2411 is rotated and the second start door 2411 is rotated because there is no win per the usual figure. There is no control that allows the game ball to be received at the start port 2004.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that the symbol is normal (step S829). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won for the normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol is stopped) The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process ends.

  In this example, in the control in the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a win, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extremely reduced. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second start port 2004 is controlled with an open / close pattern that is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 2004 is It is much easier to win a game ball to the second start port 2004 due to the long time of the game, and the game ball is more efficiently aimed at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. You can win a prize. In the non-time-short state control, it is assumed that the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. In addition, a game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 2004.

  As described above, during control in the non-time-saving state, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the second start port 2004 cannot win a game ball. In order for the game ball to win, the game ball must be fired (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center bonus 2500. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball hits the obstacle nails. By touching, various movements are given to the game ball and flow down. For this reason, even if a game ball is shot on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, it does not necessarily win the first start opening 2002, but wins the first start opening 2002. The game balls that have not existed are discharged to the outside through an out port 1126 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the time-short state control, it is possible to win a game ball more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2004 than at the first start port 2002. In order to win, the game ball must be launched (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center actor 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, it passes through the gate portion 2003. The game balls thus won are awarded to the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the control in the time-saving state, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1126 or the sub-out port 2007). Compared to the first start port 2002 during the state control, the game ball wins the second start port 2004 very efficiently.

  In addition, during the control of the short time state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. Due to the fact that the time required for control is constant and short and the time when the second start port 2004 is opened is long, it is easy for a game ball to win the second start port 2004, and further the game to the second start port 2004. When the ball is won, the time required for the display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the non-time-short state control. It is possible to digest the symbol variation display control (the suspension of the special symbol variation display control). That is, when the short hit state is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit again in a short time. It is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out by winning a game ball to the second start port 2004 is one, and therefore, the number of game balls to the second start port 2004 is Even if winnings occur frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[10. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 206, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like based on the command received from the main control board 1310 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 207 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second fluctuation pattern setting process)). Control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by being set is received.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to a speaker or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 4017 is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

[11. About the big hit gaming state of this embodiment]
In the present embodiment, a second grand prize winning port 2006 having a first receiving port 2431 and a second receiving port 2432 is provided inside, and the second receiving port 2432 is in an open state (distribution) while the second big prize winning port 2005 is opened. A game ball is distributed to the second receiving port 2432 side by the piece 2433), and a game is performed as to whether or not the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, Further, during the opening of the second big prize opening 2005, a special state (a state in which a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and a high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished) or a non-special state (first Even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it is set to one of the states that will not be controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished, and during the special state Have done what of the game or the game ball is distributed in the two receiving port 2432 (accepted). However, the player is not notified as to whether the special state or the non-special state is set during the opening of the second grand prize opening 2005, and the game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432. It is not possible to determine whether to control to a high probability state or not to control to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. A game example of whether or not the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 during such a special state will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 211.

  FIG. 208 (A) is a diagram illustrating a closed state of the second receiving port 2432 (a state where game balls are distributed to the first receiving port 2431 side by the sorting piece 2433), and FIG. It is a figure which shows the open state (state in which a game ball is distributed to the 2nd receiving port 2432 side by the sorting piece 2433) of the 2nd receiving port 2432. FIG.

  As described above, the attacker unit 2400 detects the second big prize opening 2006, the second big prize opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second big prize opening 2006, and the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2006. A second big prize opening sensor 2402. The second big prize opening door 2413 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving the second attacker solenoid 2109, and the second big prize opening 2006 is closed when the second attacker solenoid 2109 is OFF (when not energized). When the second attacker solenoid 2109 is ON (when energized), the second big prize opening 2006 is opened.

  Also, the attacker unit 2400 includes an internal passage 2430 through which game balls received in the second grand prize opening 2006 can circulate, and a first reception port 2431 and a second reception port 2432 that are open at the bottom of the internal passage 2430. The distribution piece 2433 that distributes the game balls to the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430 and the first receiving port sensor 2434 that detects the game balls received in the first receiving port 2431. And a second receiving port sensor 2435 for detecting a game ball received in the second receiving port 2432. The sorting piece 2433 is formed so as to rotate when the sorting solenoid 2110 is driven. As shown in FIG. 208 (A), when the sorting solenoid 2110 is OFF (not in operation), the sorting piece 2433 rises vertically and communicates with the second big prize opening 2006 and the first receiving port 2431. The game balls received in the second grand prize opening 2006 are distributed to the first receiving port 2431 side. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208 (B), when the sorting solenoid 2110 is ON (during operation), the upper side of the sorting piece 2433 moves to the left in the front view and comes into contact with the left side wall of the internal passage 2430. (Or approached), the second big prize opening 2006 and the second reception opening 2432 are in communication with each other, and the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2006 are distributed to the second reception opening 2432 side.

  The execution table for the big hit gaming state A shown in FIG. 209 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 1310a, and the operation schedules of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the first to fifth rounds The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 and the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 are associated with each other. Similarly, the execution table in the big hit gaming state B shown in FIG. 209 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 1310a, and the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 in the first to fifth rounds are stored. The operation schedule, the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433, and the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 are associated with each other, and the execution table in the big hit gaming state C shown in FIG. 209 (C) is the main control MPU 1310a. ROM 4100d, the operation schedule of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the 1st to 15th rounds, the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433, the state setting schedule of the second reception opening 2432, Are associated with each other. FIG. 210 (A) is a timing chart of the first to fifth rounds executed in accordance with the execution table in the big hit gaming state A, and FIG. 210 (B) is executed in accordance with the execution table in the big hit gaming state B. FIG. 210C is a timing chart of the first to fifteenth rounds executed according to the execution table in the big hit gaming state C. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (A), in the big hit gaming state A, as the operation schedules of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in each round of the first to fourth rounds, 2005 is opened only once in the first opening mode (3 seconds), and the second big winning port 2006 is set as the second opening mode as the operation schedule of the first big winning port 2005 and the second big winning port 2006 in the fifth round. It is set to open at (20 seconds). Also, from the first round to the fourth round, after the end of the previous round, it is set to start the next round when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses as the interval time between rounds. When the time is finished, the fifth round is set to start when a time (for example, 4 seconds) longer than the others has passed as the interval time between rounds. Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the fifth round, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds), the sorting piece 2433 is moved every second to receive the second receiving prize. The inlet 2432 is set to be switched between a closed state and an open state every second. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round, a special state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state) Is set to

  As shown in FIG. 209 (B), in the big hit gaming state B, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the first round, The process of releasing in 3 seconds) is set to be repeated 4 times. In the first round, after the first grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to be closed, when the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses as the in-round interval time, the first big prize opening 2005 is again opened to the first opening mode ( 3 seconds).

  In the big hit gaming state B, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the second round, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds). Is set. Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the second round, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds), the sorting piece 2433 is moved every second to receive the second receiving prize. The inlet 2432 is set to be switched between a closed state and an open state every second. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the second round, a non-special state (even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Status).

  In the big hit gaming state B, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the third round, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened in the third release mode (6 seconds), After the first big prize opening 2005 is controlled to be closed, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened again in the third opening mode (6 seconds) when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses as the in-round interval time. Is set to Also, in the big hit gaming state B, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the fourth round, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened only once in the third release mode (6 seconds). It is set to be.

  Also, in the big hit gaming state B, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the fifth round, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds). Is set. Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the fifth round, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds), the sorting piece 2433 is moved every second to receive the second receiving prize. The inlet 2432 is set to be switched between a closed state and an open state every second. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round, a special state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state) Is set to

  In the big hit gaming state B, the second round to the fourth round are set to start the next round when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed as the interval time between rounds after the end of the previous round. When the first round ends and when the fourth round ends, the next round (when the first round ends is 2 when a time longer than the others (for example, 4 seconds) elapses). The fifth round is set to start when the fourth and fourth rounds are completed.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (C), in the big hit gaming state C, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the first round, the first big prize opening 2005 is set to the first opening mode ( The process of releasing in 3 seconds) is set to be repeated 4 times. In addition, when the first grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to be closed, the first big prize opening 2005 is again opened in the first opening mode (3 seconds) after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed as the interval time in the round. It is set to open.

  Also, in the big hit gaming state C, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the second round, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds). Is set. Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the second round, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds), the sorting piece 2433 is moved every second to receive the second receiving prize. The inlet 2432 is set to be switched between a closed state and an open state every second. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the second round, a non-special state (even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Status).

  In the jackpot gaming state C, the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened in the third release mode (6 seconds) as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 in the third round. After a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed as the inner interval time, the second big prize opening 2006 is set to be opened again in the third release mode (6 seconds). Also, in the big hit gaming state C, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the fourth round, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened only once in the third release mode (6 seconds). It is set to be.

  Also, in the big hit gaming state C, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the fifth round, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds). Is set. Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the fifth round, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds), the sorting piece 2433 is moved every second to receive the second receiving prize. The inlet 2432 is set to be switched between a closed state and an open state every second. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round, a special state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state) Is set to

  In the jackpot gaming state C, the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened once only once as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in each of the sixth to fourteenth rounds. It is set to open in the mode (20 seconds).

  Also, in the big hit gaming state C, as the operation schedule of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the 15th round, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds). Is set. Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the fifteenth round, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the second release mode (20 seconds), the sorting piece 2433 is moved every second to receive the second receiving prize. The inlet 2432 is set to be switched between a closed state and an open state every second. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2432 in the 15th round, a non-special state (even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Status).

  In the big hit gaming state B, the second round to the fourth round and the fifth round to the fourteenth round when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed as the interval time between rounds after the end of the previous round. It is set to start the next round, when the first round is finished, when the fourth round is finished, and when the fourteenth round is finished, the interval time between rounds is longer than others (for example, 4 seconds) ) Is set to start the next round (the second round when the first round ends, the fifth round when the fourth round ends, the fifteenth round when the fourteenth round ends) ing.

  As shown in FIGS. 210 (A) to 210 (C), in the jackpot gaming state A, the jackpot gaming state B, and the jackpot gaming state C, the entire first to fifth rounds of the jackpot gaming state A and the jackpot gaming state In the entire first and second rounds of B and jackpot gaming state C, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the opening timing of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are the same. In the jackpot gaming state B and the jackpot gaming state C, the first big winning opening 2005 and the first round in the first to fifth rounds of the jackpot gaming state B and the entire first to fifth rounds of the jackpot gaming state C are shown. The opening time, the number of times of opening, and the opening timing of the two major winning prize openings 2006 are the same.

  Note that the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened in each round of the first to fourth rounds is different between the jackpot gaming state A, the jackpot gaming state B, and the jackpot gaming state C. Since the player has not been notified of the number of rounds, it is difficult to determine the current round from the number of times the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened. In the case of, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening in the big hit gaming state until the second round is finished until the fifth round is finished, or in the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C. Until 2006 is controlled to open and close five times, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the jackpot gaming state A, the jackpot gaming state B, or the jackpot gaming state C.

  Also, in the jackpot gaming state B and the jackpot gaming state C, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the opening timing of the first big winning port 2005 and the second big winning port 2006 in each of the first to fifth rounds are the same. Therefore, until the fifth round is finished, in other words, until the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to open and close nine times in the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C It is difficult for the player to determine whether the

  In the big hit gaming state A, the fifth opening of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 corresponds to the fifth round, and a special state (a game ball is accepted into the second receiving opening 2432). Is set to a high-probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state), but in the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, 5 of the first big winning port 2005 and the second big winning port 2006 The opening time of the second time corresponds to the second round, and is set to a non-special state (a state in which even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it will not be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state). The In the jackpot gaming state B and the jackpot gaming state C, the 9th opening time of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 corresponds to the fifth round, and the special state (the game at the second receiving port 2432 is played). When the ball is accepted, it is set to a high probability state after completion of the big hit gaming state. In the big hit gaming state C, the 19th opening of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 corresponds to the fifteenth round, and the game ball is accepted into the non-special state (the second receiving opening 2432). Even if the big hit gaming state is ended, the high probability state is not controlled).

  As described above, in this example, the number of rounds at the fifth opening of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 is, in addition, a special state or a non-special state. The player is not notified as to whether it is set. For this reason, at the time of the fifth opening of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2006 were distributed to the second receiving opening 2432 (accepted). ), It is difficult for the player to determine whether to control to a high probability state or not to control to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the sorting piece 2433 is started when the opening of the second big prize opening 2006 is started, but the distribution is made before the second big prize opening 2006 is closed. The operation of the piece 2433 is terminated. In addition, when the opening of the second big prize opening 2006 is started, a special state (a state in which a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and a high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished) or not A special state (a state in which even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 is not controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished), the second big prize opening 2006 is closed. The set special state or non-special state is continued until the next round is started later. For this reason, for example, before the opening time of the second big prize opening 2006 elapses, the second big prize opening 2006 is based on the fact that the game balls have won the maximum number of prizes (for example, nine) in the second big prize opening 2006. Is controlled to the closed state, even if the game ball distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 reaches the second receiving port sensor 2433 after the second big prize opening 2006 is closed, It is possible to determine whether the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state or the non-special state.

  In addition, in the jackpot gaming state A, the jackpot gaming state B, and the jackpot gaming state C, rounds for controlling the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 2006 (the fifth round in the jackpot gaming state A, the second round and the fifth round in the jackpot gaming state B) In the second, fifth, and fifteenth rounds in the big win game state C), the special state or the non-special state is set, but for other periods, for example, the first big prize opening 2005 As a general rule, the game balls are not received (sorted) in the second receiving port 2432 in the round in which the game is opened, and the invalid state is set different from the special state and the non-special state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each round in the jackpot gaming state A, the jackpot gaming state B, and the jackpot gaming state C, the opening time of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning prize opening 2006 has elapsed. Even when the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 9) is won in the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second major prize opening 2006, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are set. The closed state is controlled. Further, in the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C in which the first big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened and closed multiple times in one round, the game balls are placed in the first big winning opening 2005 (for example, 9) When winning a prize, the first grand prize opening 2005 is controlled to the closed state even if the number of times of opening and closing control in the first big prize opening 2005 has not been reached, and then the round is not controlled again. To end.

  Further, when the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is closed before the opening time of the second big winning prize opening 2006 elapses, the sorting piece 2433 is deactivated if the sorting piece 2433 is in operation. I am doing so. However, a special state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and a high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished) or a non-special state (a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432). For the setting of the high probability state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the second big prize opening 2006 is closed before the opening time of the second big prize opening 2006 elapses. Even in the case of the state, either the set special state or the non-special state is continued until the next round is started.

  In this embodiment, the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 is set such that the sorting piece 2433 is moved every second and the second receiving port 2432 is switched between the closed state and the opened state every second. Each time a round of controlling the opening / closing of the second big prize opening 2006 in the jackpot gaming state A, the jackpot gaming state B, and the jackpot gaming state C is started, The operation schedule of the segment 2433 is started. Thus, by making the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 a single operation schedule, the amount of data related to the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 is prevented from increasing as much as possible.

  In the above embodiment, when the first big prize opening 2005 is opened a plurality of times in each round in the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, the previous opening of the first big prize opening 2005 is terminated. 2 seconds is set as the intra-round interval in the round interval period from the start of the next round to the start of the next round. In addition, 2 seconds is set as the interval time between rounds in the round interval period from the end of the previous round to the start of the next round. Thus, by setting the interval time within a round and the interval time between rounds to the same time (2 seconds), 1-5 rounds of jackpot gaming state A, jackpot gaming state B, and jackpot gaming state C A series of opening patterns (operation patterns) of the first big winning opening 2005 during the generation period can be approximated by the big hit gaming state A, the big hit gaming state B, and the big hit gaming state C.

[12. Examples of production during the big hit gaming state]
Next, specific examples of effects when the jackpot game state A, jackpot game state B, and jackpot game state C are executed in the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 213. In the present embodiment, in the first to fifth rounds corresponding to the first to fifth opening of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the big hit gaming state A, in the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C In the first and second rounds corresponding to the first to fifth opening of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, a common presentation is executed on the presentation display device 1600, and the big hit gaming state A, the big hit In the fifth round of each of the gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened and the special state (the game ball is placed in the second receiving entrance 2432 when the second big winning prize opening 2006 is opened). Is accepted, it is set to a state in which a high probability state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  The effect display device 1600 starts the left / middle / right decoration symbol variation display based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received by the peripheral control board 1510, and the left decoration symbol → the right decoration symbol → the middle The display is controlled so as to stop display in the order of the decorative symbols. However, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped, the big hit A (of the big bonuses related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command ( 5R) is determined as a big hit A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when big hit B (5R) is specified, it is determined as a big hit B symbol (common with the big hit A symbol), and the big hit C When (15R) is specified, the jackpot C symbol (common to the jackpot A symbol and jackpot B symbol) is determined, and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (reach effect) Controls display the determined stop symbols to effect display device 1600 in Ryoji). In this way, regardless of whether the big hit A (5R), big hit B (5R), or big hit C (15R) is determined, the effect display device 1600 displays and controls a common stop symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Thus, it is impossible to determine whether the big hit A (5R), the big hit B (5R), or the big hit C (15R) from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, while the jackpot gaming state A is being executed, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the round end command (4 round A end command) of the fourth round and then receives the round start command (5 round A start command) of the fifth round. The peripheral control board 1510 receives the first round end command (one round B end command, one round C end command) during the execution of the round interval period until jackpot game state B and jackpot game state C Round interval period from when the second round start command (2 round B start command, 2 round C start command) is received, that is, 4 of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 in the big hit gaming state After the opening of the first round, the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize In the round interval until the opening of the fifth opening of the mouth 2006 starts, the first receiving hole 2432 receives the game ball at the fifth opening of the first winning opening 2005 and the second winning opening 2006. A target instruction effect indicating that the time when the second receiving port 2432 is opened (when the sorting piece 2433 is activated) is executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211 (A), a message “chance ?!” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second major prize opening 2006 are opened for the fourth time. After notifying the player that some state has occurred, as shown in FIG. 211 (B), the fourth opening of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 is completed, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a round end command (4 round A end command for jackpot gaming state A, 1 round B end command for jackpot gaming state B, 1 round C end command for jackpot gaming state C) Then, when the fifth opening of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 is started, the peripheral control board 1510 receives a round start command (a big hit gaming state) In the round interval period until the reception of 5 round A start command, 2 round B start command in the case of jackpot gaming state B, 2 round C start command in the case of jackpot gaming state C) Aim! "Message is displayed. Accordingly, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the time when the second receiving port 2432 (V attacker) is opened while the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened, and when the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432. It can be understood that a new state occurs.

  In the present embodiment, a cover member is provided on the front side of the attacker unit 2400 including the second grand prize opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, the sorting piece 2433, and the like, but the cover member is transparent. Therefore, whether or not a game ball has been received in the second big prize opening 2006, whether or not the sorting piece 2433 is operating (whether or not the second receiving port 2432 is in an open state), second It is easy to visually recognize whether or not the game ball is received (distributed) in the receiving port 2432.

  When the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the jackpot gaming state A, the jackpot gaming state B, and the jackpot gaming state C, the peripheral control board 1510 receives a round start command (5 rounds A in the jackpot gaming state A). Start command, 2 round B start command and 5 round start command for jackpot gaming state B, 2 round C start command, 5 round start command, and 15 round start command for jackpot gaming state C) Based on this, an image indicating the location of the second receiving port 2432 that the player should aim at is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 while the second big prize opening 2006 is opened. The player may be made aware of where on the game area 5a in order to be Players such as the second big prize opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, and the sorting piece 2433 are irradiated by LEDs from the back side of the attacker unit 2400 including the 2006, the second receiving port 2432, the sorting piece 2433, and the like. You may make it stand out where to aim. In addition, except for the attacker unit 2400 including the second grand prize opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, the sorting piece 2433, etc., by controlling the light emission of the LED etc. so that the entire game area 5a becomes dark, You may make it make the place which a player should aim, such as the 2nd big prize opening 2006, the 2nd receiving opening 2432, and the distribution piece 2433, stand out relatively. Thereby, in order for a game ball to be received in the 2nd entrance 2432 during the opening of the 2nd big winning opening 2006, it can be grasped easily where to aim on the game field 5a.

  Further, as another example of a technique for making the player easily distinguish the second big prize winning opening 2006, the second receiving port 2432, and the sorting piece 2433, the following may be performed. For example, “the second grand prize opening 2006 has a structure that allows easy identification of the opening / closing operation (for example, an electric Chu type or an open type in which the opening / closing door is inclined forward”), “the opening of the second big prize opening 2006. For example, “the area should be larger than the opening area of the first big prize opening 2005”.

  Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the second reception pass command A or the second reception command B when executing the big hit gaming state A, the big hit gaming state B, and the big hit gaming state C, that is, a special state or a non-special When a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 within any period of the state, an effect at the time of passing V indicating that the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 is executed. Specifically, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in a special state before the second receiving port passage flag is set (a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 for the first time in the special state). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the second reception port passage command A or the second reception port passage command B and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (D), the peripheral control board 1510 receives the second reception port passage command A or the second reception port passage command B, and as shown in FIG. , The player is notified of the message “Get a V prize!”. Thereby, for example, even when the player misses whether or not the game ball is actually received at the second receiving port 2432, it is clearly known that the game ball has been received at the second receiving port 2432. Can be expected to be advantageous to the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first big winning opening 2005 and the first round of the big hit gaming state A from the first round to the fifth round and the first round to the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C Since the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 2006 is substantially the same and the player is not notified of the number of rounds being executed in the big hit gaming state, the current round is determined from the number of times the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened. It is difficult for the player to determine which of the big hit gaming state A, the big hit gaming state B, and the big hit gaming state C is being executed. Also, when the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is opened, it is set to a special state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). The player is not notified of whether or not it is set to a non-special state (a state in which even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it will not be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state) . Furthermore, in the effect display device 1600, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state (when the second receiving port passage command A is received), and in the second receiving port 2432 during the non-special state. When the game ball is received (when the second reception port passage command B is received), the V passing effect is executed in common. For this reason, even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 while the second grand prize opening 2006 is open, the period during which the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 was set to a special state. Alternatively, it is not possible to determine whether the non-special state has been set, that is, whether to control to a high probability state or not to control to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  Note that the big hit gaming state A ends when the fifth round, which is the fifth opening of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, has ended. Also, in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state A, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, a special state (the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 to control the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). Is set to the state to be That is, when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state A, a high probability state (so-called so-called after the big hit gaming state A ends). When the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432, the transition control is performed to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state A ends. Further, in the effect display device 1600, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state A, the second control unit 1510 receives the second receiving ball from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. After the entrance passage command A is transmitted and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the second reception passage passage command A, after executing the V passage effect indicating that the game ball has been received by the second reception port 2432 When the jackpot game state A is terminated, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the jackpot end command (big hit A end command A) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and shifts to the high probability state. Profit change transition effect is executed to indicate that the game ball is received, and the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state A. If not, it is based on the fact that the peripheral control board 1510 has received a big hit end command (big hit A end command B) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the big hit gaming state A is ended. A time-short transition effect indicating that the transition control to the time-short state is performed.

  Specifically, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state A, the second receiving port passing flag is set when the big hit gaming state A is ended. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit A end command A to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit A end command A, as shown in FIG. 211 (E), the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “Big hit end, probability change rush!”. . On the other hand, if the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state A, the second receiving port passing flag is not set when the big hit gaming state A is ended. Based on this, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit A end command B to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit A end command B, the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “Big hit end, short break-in!”. Thus, when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, the transition control to a high probability state is performed as an advantageous state for the player, and when the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432, the high probability state is started. Is also informed that the transition control to the short time state which is disadvantageous to the player is performed.

  On the other hand, in the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, A state in which control is not performed to a high probability state after completion). That is, even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, the big hit gaming state B and After the big hit gaming state C ends, the transition control to the high probability state is not performed.

  The jackpot gaming state B and the jackpot gaming state C continue even after the second round, which is the fifth opening of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, is completed. Therefore, the second receiving port 2432 is not limited to the case where a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 when the second winning port 2006 is opened in the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C. Even if the game ball is not accepted, the big hit game state is continued. In the effect display device 1600, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transfers to the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the fact that the second acceptance passage command B is transmitted and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the second acceptance passage command B, an effect at the time of passing V indicating that the game ball is accepted by the second acceptance port 2432 is provided. After execution, based on the end of the second round, the main control MPU 1310a sends a round end command to the peripheral control board 1510 (2 round B end command for the big hit gaming state B, 2 for the big hit gaming state C). Round C end command) and the peripheral control board 1510 sends a round end command (big hit gaming state B). 2 round B end command, and in the case of big hit gaming state C, the round transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 when starting the third round. Pass indicating that the jackpot gaming state is continued during the round interval period until the start command (three round B start command in the case of jackpot gaming state B, three round C start command in the case of jackpot gaming state C) is received When the continuation effect is executed and the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 in the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, the main control is based on the completion of the second round. Round end command from MPU 1310a to peripheral control board 1510 (2 rounds in case of big hit gaming state B) B end command, 2 round C end command in the case of jackpot gaming state C), the peripheral control board 1510 is a round end command (in the case of jackpot gaming state B, 2 round B end command, jackpot gaming state C of In the case of 2 round C end command), the round start command (3 round B in the case of big hit gaming state B) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 when starting the third round The non-passing continuation state indicating that the jackpot gaming state is to be continued after indicating that the jackpot gaming state is ended in the round interval period until receiving the start command, or the three round C start command in the case of jackpot gaming state C) Perform the production.

  Specifically, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, the second receiving port is input from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Pass command B is transmitted. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sends a round end command transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a based on the end of the second round (in the case of the big hit gaming state B, the two round B end command, in the case of the big hit gaming state C) If the second reception pass command B is received during the execution of the second round, as shown in FIG. 211 (E ′), the second round ends. In the effect display device 1600 during the round interval period until the third round is started, the player is informed of the message “Continue to the big hit!”. On the other hand, if a game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432 in the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C, the second control unit 1510 receives the second reception from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The entrance passage command B is not transmitted. In this case, a round end command transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a based on the end of the second round (two round B end command in the case of big hit gaming state B, two rounds in the case of big hit gaming state C) (C end command), the peripheral control board 1510 starts the third round after the end of the second round based on the fact that the second reception pass command B is not received during the execution of the second round. In the effect display device 1600, during the round interval period until the game, the player once notifies the player of the message “Big hit end, short break-in!” And then performs the reviving effect and notifies the player of the message “Continue to hit the jackpot!” doing. Thus, when the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it is notified that the big hit gaming state is continued as an advantageous state for the player.

  In addition, when controlling to the big hit gaming state as described above, the player can determine whether the big hit gaming state A, the big hit gaming state B, or the big hit gaming state C is controlled. Have difficulty. That is, whether or not it is determined that the big hit gaming state is to be continued even after the fifth opening of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 is finished (the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C). It is difficult to determine whether or not any of the above is executed. Therefore, when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 when the first big winning port 2005 and the second big winning port 2006 are opened for the fifth time, the big hit gaming state is ended and the transition control to the high probability state is performed. In other words, it is difficult to determine whether the big hit gaming state is continued, and attention can be paid to the effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Further, even when the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432 when the first big winning port 2005 and the second big winning port 2006 are opened for the fifth time, the big hit gaming state is ended and the transition to the short time state is controlled. Since it is difficult to determine whether or not the big hit gaming state is continued, attention can be paid to the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 while expecting the continuation of the big hit gaming state.

  Thus, in this example, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big are the first round to the fifth round of the big hit gaming state A and the first round to the second round of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C. A special state when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened by making the opening pattern of the winning prize opening 2006 substantially the same (a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by accepting a game ball in the second receiving opening 2432 Or a non-special state (a state in which, even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, it will not be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state). It is difficult to determine whether the game is set, and if it is a big hit game state A, the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and the high hit value after the big hit game state ends. The jackpot gaming state in which the player is given the benefit of controlling the transition to the rate state, and if the jackpot gaming state B and the jackpot gaming state C are received by the second receiving port 2432, the jackpot gaming state is continued. An effect that gives the player a profit different from the case of A is executed.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second round are also obtained in the first to fifth rounds of the jackpot gaming state B and the first to fifth rounds of the jackpot gaming state C. The opening pattern of the big prize opening 2006 is substantially the same. Further, as described above, since the player is not notified of the number of rounds being executed in the big hit gaming state, it is difficult to determine the current round from the number of times the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened. It is difficult for the player to determine which of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C is being executed. Also, when the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is opened, it is set to a special state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). The player is not notified of whether or not it is set to a non-special state (a state in which even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it will not be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state) . Furthermore, in the effect display device 1600, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the special state (when the second receiving port passage command A is received), and in the second receiving port 2432 during the non-special state. When the game ball is received (when the second reception port passage command B is received), the V passing effect is executed in common. For this reason, even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 while the second grand prize opening 2006 is open, the period during which the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 was set to a special state. Alternatively, it is not possible to determine whether the non-special state has been set, that is, whether to control to a high probability state or not to control to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  The big hit gaming state B ends when the fifth round, which is the ninth opening of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, has ended. Also, in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state B, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, a special state (a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 to control to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). Is set to the state to be That is, when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state B, a high probability state (so-called so-called When the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432, the transition control is performed to the short time state after the big hit gaming state B is finished. Further, in the effect display device 1600, when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state B, the second control unit 1510 receives the second reception from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. After the entrance passage command A is transmitted and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the second reception passage passage command A, after executing the V passage effect indicating that the game ball has been received by the second reception port 2432 When the jackpot gaming state B ends, the peripheral control board 1510 shifts to the high probability state based on receiving the jackpot end command (big hit B end command A) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Probability transition effect is executed to indicate that a game ball is received by the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state B. Otherwise, based on the fact that the peripheral control board 1510 has received a big hit end command (big hit B end command B) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the big hit gaming state B is ended. A time-short transition effect indicating that the transition control to the time-short state is performed.

  Specifically, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state B, the second receiving port passing flag is set when the big hit gaming state B is ended. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit B end command A to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit B end command A, as shown in FIG. 212 (K), the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “Big hit end, probability change rush!”. . On the other hand, if the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state B, the second receiving port passing flag is not set when the big hit gaming state B is ended. Based on this, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit B end command B to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit B end command B, the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “Big hit end, short break-in!”. Thus, when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, the transition control to a high probability state is performed as an advantageous state for the player, and when the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432, the high probability state is started. Is also informed that the transition control to the short time state which is disadvantageous to the player is performed.

  If the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state B, and the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 in the second round, the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a transmits a big hit B end command B to the peripheral control board 1510. If a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the second round, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 The jackpot B end command B ′ is transmitted to the player, and a message “End of jackpot, short break-in!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the jackpot B end command B. After the end of the jackpot gaming state based on receiving the jackpot B end command B ' An effect of whether or not to control to a high probability state may be performed to notify the control to the time-short state, or the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “Large hit, time-rushed in!”. After the jackpot gaming state is finished (for example, after the end of the jackpot gaming state B, after several fluctuations to several tens of fluctuations are performed as a special symbol variation display), a high-probability state with a decorative symbol variation effect, etc. It may be possible to notify the player that the transition control is not performed to the high probability state by performing a promotion effect on whether or not the transition control is performed, and in this case, it may be controlled to the high probability state. The game can be continued with expectation.

  Similarly, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state B, if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the second round, the main control board 1310 While the main control MPU 1310a transmits a big hit B end command A to the peripheral control board 1510, if the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 in the second round, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the peripheral control board 1510. The jackpot end command A ′ is transmitted to the player, and the message “End of jackpot, probable rush!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the jackpot B end command A. , And once received the jackpot B end command A ' ”Is sent to the player, and then a rebirth effect or the like is performed to notify the player of the message“ End of jackpot, probable rush! ”, Or the message“ End of jackpot, rush into time! ” After the jackpot gaming state is ended by notifying the player (for example, after a change of several to several tens of fluctuations is displayed as a special symbol variation display after the jackpot gaming state B ends) The player may be notified that the transition control to the high probability state is performed by performing a promotion effect that controls the transition to the high probability state, etc., and in this case, it may be controlled to the high probability state The game can be continued with the expectation of not knowing. Further, by configuring in this way, in the big hit gaming state B in which the second receiving opening 2432 is opened and the opportunity to accept the game ball is provided a plurality of times by opening the second large winning opening 2006, the plurality of times Depending on the result of the opportunity (2nd round and 5th round) (whether or not the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432), it is possible to vary the contents of the effect when the big hit gaming state is ended.

  The jackpot gaming state C is a special state when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the fifth round as in the jackpot gaming state A and the jackpot gaming state B (the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432). Is set to a high-probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state). That is, if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state C, a high probability state (so-called “so-called”) is reached after the big hit gaming state C ends. When the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432, the transition control is performed to the short time state after the big hit gaming state C is completed. The jackpot gaming state C continues even after the fifth round, which is the ninth opening of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, is completed. Therefore, even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state C, a notification is made that the transition control to the high probability state (so-called probabilistic state) is performed after the big hit gaming state C ends. Without having to, continue the jackpot gaming state. As described above, in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state C, the big hit gaming state is continued regardless of whether or not the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432.

  In the effect display device 1600, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state C, the second receiving port passes from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. After the command A is transmitted and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the second receiving port passing command A, the V passing effect indicating that the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 is executed. Based on the end of the round, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a round end command (5 round C end command) to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the round end command (5 round C end command). In this case, the peripheral control board 151 from the main control MPU 1310a when starting the sixth round. In the round interval period until the round start command (6 round C start command) transmitted to is received, the effect of continuing the passing is shown indicating that the big hit gaming state is continued. If the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432, a round end command (5 round C end command) is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the end of the fifth round. When the control board 1510 receives a round end command (5 round C end command), a round start command (6-round C start command) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 when starting the sixth round Jackpot play in the round interval period until receiving After showing that to end the state indicating to continue the jackpot gaming state to perform the time effect non-passing continuously.

  Specifically, when a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state C, the second receiving port passage command A is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Is done. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a round end command (5 round C end command) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a based on the end of the fifth round, the peripheral control board 1510 passes through the second reception port during the execution of the fifth round. If the command B has been received, as shown in FIG. 212 (K ′), in the effect display device 1600 during the round interval period from the end of the fifth round to the start of the sixth round, “continue the big hit! Is sent to the player. On the other hand, if the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state C, the second receiving port passing command A is sent from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Do not send. In this case, when receiving the round end command (5 round C end command) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a based on the end of the fifth round, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the second round during the execution of the fifth round. Based on the fact that the reception pass command A has not been received, in the effect display device 1600 during the round interval period from the end of the 5th round to the start of the 6th round, it is said that the “big hit end, short time entry!” After notifying the player of the message, a rebirth effect or the like is performed to notify the player of the message “Continue jackpot!”. Thus, when the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, it is notified that the big hit gaming state is continued as an advantageous state for the player.

  In the big hit gaming state C, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened again in the fifteenth round which is the 19th opening of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006. In the 15th round of the big hit gaming state C, when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened, a non-special state (even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). In a state where no control is performed). That is, even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the 15th round of the big hit gaming state C, a high probability state after the big hit gaming state C ends. No transition control.

  The jackpot gaming state C ends when the fifteenth round, which is the 19th opening of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, is completed. That is, the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, not only when the second receiving port 2432 is opened when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the 15th round of the big hit gaming state C. Even if it is not, the big hit gaming state is terminated.

  In the big hit gaming state C, a special state is set when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the fifth round, and in a fifteenth round, a non-special state is set when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. The Therefore, even if a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 in the 15th round, the transition control to the high probability state is not necessarily performed after the end of the big hit gaming state C. Whether or not the transition control to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state C is determined according to whether or not the game ball is received at the entrance 2432.

  Thus, at the time of execution of the 15th round of the big hit gaming state C (according to the result of the fifth round), it is already determined whether or not the transition control to the high probability state is performed after the big hit gaming state C ends. However, as described above, the player is not notified of the special state or the non-special state, and therefore the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 in the 15th round of the big hit game state C. In addition, based on the fact that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has transmitted the second reception pass command B to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 has received the second reception pass command B, the effect display device 1600 In FIG. 213, a V-passing effect indicating that a game ball has been received at the second receiving port 2432 is executed (FIG. 213 (P)). If the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state C when the big hit gaming state C is finished, that is, if the second receiving port passing flag is set, the peripheral control is performed. Based on the fact that the board 1510 has received the jackpot end command (big hit C end command A) transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, it performs an effect change transition effect indicating that the transition control to the high probability state is performed, If the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 in the fifth round of the big hit gaming state C, that is, if the second receiving port passing flag is not set, the peripheral control board 1510 is the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on receiving the jackpot end command (big jack C end command B) sent from To perform at the production time reduction migrate indicating that.

  Specifically, if the second acceptance passage flag is set when the big hit gaming state C is ended, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit C end command A to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit C end command A, as shown in FIG. 213 (Q), the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “Big hit end, probability change rush!”. . On the other hand, if the second acceptance passage flag is not set when the big hit gaming state C is ended, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit C end command B to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big hit C end command B, the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “Big hit end, short break-in!”.

  If a game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 in the 15th round of the big hit gaming state C, and the second receiving port passing flag is not set (the fifth receiving port 2432 in the fifth round). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit C end command B to the peripheral control board 1510 while the second reception pass flag is set (in the fifth round) The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is configured to send a big hit C end command A ′ to the peripheral control board 1510 (if the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432). Based on the receipt of the end command B, the effect display device 1600 displays a message “End of jackpot, short rush!” The player is notified of the game and once received the jackpot C end command A ′, the player once notifies the player of the message “Hit the jackpot, rush into the time!” The message “Probably entered!” May be notified to the player, or after the message “End of jackpot, short rush!” Is sent to the player and the jackpot gaming state is terminated (for example, the jackpot gaming state After the end of C, after several fluctuations to several tens of fluctuations are displayed as a special symbol fluctuation display), the transition to a high probability state is performed by performing a promotion effect that controls the transition to a high probability state with a decorative symbol variation effect, etc. The player may be notified that the game is being controlled, and in this case, the game can be continued with the expectation that it may be controlled to a high probability state.

  Similarly, when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 in the 15th round of the big hit gaming state C, if the second receiving port passing flag is set (the second receiving port 2432 at the fifth round). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit C end command A to the peripheral control board 1510 if the game ball is accepted (if the second receiving port passing flag is not set) The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a big hit C end command B ′ to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 hits the big hit C (when a game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432). Based on the reception of the end command A, the message “End of jackpot, probable rush!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The player is notified, and based on the fact that the jackpot C end command B ′ is received, the effect of whether or not to control to the high probability state is performed after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the control to the time reduction state is notified. Alternatively, after the player is informed of the message “Large jackpot, short break-in!” And the jackpot gaming state is terminated (for example, after the jackpot gaming state C ends, the number of changes as a special symbol variation display) After several tens of fluctuations are made, the player is notified that the transition control to the high probability state is not performed by performing the promotion effect such as whether or not the transition control to the high probability state is performed by the decoration effect of the decoration symbol or the like. In this case, the game can be continued with the expectation that it may be controlled to a high probability state. Further, by configuring in this way, in the big hit gaming state C in which the second winning opening 2006 is opened to allow the second receiving port 2432 to receive a game ball a plurality of times, the plurality of times As a result of multiple occasions of the opportunity that occurs at least at the end (15th round) and the opportunity that is in a special state (5th round) (whether or not a game ball has been received at the second entrance 2432) ), It is possible to vary the contents of the effect when the big hit gaming state is ended.

  As described above, in the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C of the present example, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened, and the second receiving port 2432 is provided with a plurality of opportunities to receive the game ball. In this example, a non-special state is set at the earliest opportunity among a plurality of occasions where a game ball can be received at the second receiving port 2432, and a subsequent opportunity (in this example, the game ball is placed at the second receiving port 2432). Is set to the special state at the second of the three occasions that can be accepted, but is not limited to this, it should be set to the special state at any opportunity except the earliest opportunity ) Is set to a special state. As described above, when the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, the game is input to the second receiving port 2432 before the game is actually set to the special state which is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Even if the ball is accepted, it is set to a non-special state that will not be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state, so that the gaming state after the big hit gaming state (whether it becomes a state advantageous to the player or not) In the non-special state that does not affect the game), once the player has experienced the game of aiming to open the second receiving port 2432 (V attacker) while the second big prize opening 2006 is open, New in the big hit gaming state where a special state affecting the later gaming state (whether or not it will be advantageous to the player) is desired, in other words, it is practiced and brought to production Can be realized, such a game.

  Also, by opening the second grand prize opening 2006, only one out of a plurality of occasions where the game ball can be received at the second entrance 2432 is set to a special state, and all other occasions are set to a non-special state. Therefore, the frequency of accepting game balls to the second receiving port 2432 can be increased without increasing the transition control probability to the high probability state. In addition, it is set in a special state or not in a special state without notifying the player of a chance to be set in a special state among a plurality of occasions where a game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432. In order to make it difficult to determine whether or not the game ball is not received at the second receiving port 2432 when it is set in a special state, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from deteriorating immediately, and after the big hit game state ends, The game can be played while expecting the notification of whether or not the transition control to the probability state is performed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened by making the effect display in the big hit gaming state and the opening patterns of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 substantially the same. In order to make it difficult to determine the state of the case (whether it is a special state or a non-special state), which of the different benefits is given when a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 On the other hand, it can be expected, but even if a game ball is not accepted in the second entrance 2432, it is expected that the second grand prize opening 2006 will be opened again without immediately reducing interest. The game can be continued. In addition, even if the game ball is received (distributed) at the second receiving port 2432, it is difficult for the player to determine whether to control to a high probability state or not to control to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Therefore, even if a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432, the player is not given a sense of security and has a sense of expectation or a sense of tension as to whether or not to control to a high probability state. It is possible to continue the big hit game while giving to.

  Further, the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened in the first round of the big hit gaming state A, the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C is different (one time in the big hit gaming state A, the big hit gaming state B and the big hit game In the game state C, the number of times the second big prize opening 2006 is released in the second round is the same number of times (1 time). At that time, the jackpot gaming state A, the jackpot gaming state B, and the jackpot gaming state C are generated in rounds 1 to 5 of the jackpot gaming state A while varying the number of times of opening the first big winning opening 2005 in the first round. The first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening in the generation period of the first and second rounds of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 and the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C in the period Although the number of times of opening the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 is set so that the total number of times opened in 2006 is the same, the special state is generated in the fifth round, It can be difficult to determine how many rounds are being performed from the opening and closing operations of the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize winning opening 2006, and the above-described game characteristics can be realized more effectively. That.

  In addition, a series of opening and closing modes of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the first to fifth rounds of the big hit gaming state A and the first to second rounds of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C are made the same. At the same time, by making the series of opening and closing modes of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 in rounds 1 to 5 of the big hit gaming state B and the big hit gaming state C the same, Even if the opening operation of the two major winning openings 2006 is seen, it is difficult (or cannot be determined) whether the special state or the non-special state is set, and the above-described game characteristics are more effectively realized. be able to.

  Note that a series of opening / closing modes of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the first to fifth rounds of the jackpot gaming state A and the first to second rounds of the jackpot gaming state B and the jackpot gaming state C, the jackpot gaming state The series of opening / closing modes of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 in rounds 1 to 5 of B and jackpot gaming state C may be partially different as long as they are approximate. For example, to the extent of approximating the opening time and opening timing in some opening operations among the multiple opening operations of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 (the first grand prize winning opening 2005 and the second grand prize winning prize As a series of opening and closing modes of the mouth 2006, the opening time of the first grand prize opening 2005 is changed to “4 seconds” instead of “3 seconds” (changed to a slightly longer time), or the second big prize winning opening The opening time of 2006 may be changed to “19 seconds” instead of “20 seconds” (changed to a slightly shorter time). Note that the difference between the different opening times is not limited to the above-described one as long as it is difficult for the player to determine. In this way, by opening and closing the series of opening and closing modes of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 to an approximate degree, the opening operation of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second major prize opening 2006 is performed. Even if it sees, it can be made difficult to distinguish whether it is set to the special state or the non-special state, and the game property equivalent to the game property mentioned above can be implement | achieved.

  Further, the series of opening / closing modes of the second grand prize winning opening 2006 may include an operating mode of the sorting piece 2433 provided in the second big winning prize winning opening 2006. In this example, the big hit gaming state A, the big hit In the game state B and the big hit game state C, the operation time and operation timing of the sorting piece 2433 when the second big prize opening 2006 is opened are approximated (substantially the same). Note that the operation time and operation timing of the sorting piece 2433 when the second big prize winning opening 2006 is opened are partially different as long as they are approximate in the big hit gaming state A, the big hit gaming state B, and the big hit gaming state C. It may be a thing. In this case as well, it is difficult to determine whether the special state or the non-special state is set even if the opening operation of the second grand prize opening 2006 and the operation of the sorting piece 2433 are seen. A game performance equivalent to that of a game can be realized.

  In addition, since it is difficult to determine whether the state is set to the special state or the non-special state by looking at the opening operation of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, the big hit gaming state A, the big hit gaming state While predicting which of B and jackpot gaming state C is controlled, while predicting how many times the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are set to a special state, It is possible to entertain the game whether or not the game ball is received (sorted) in the second receiving port 2432.

  Moreover, according to the said embodiment, the following game effects can also be show | played compared with the past. That is, in the conventional “game machine that controls to a high probability state based on receiving a game ball at the second receiving port 2432”, a mode in which a ball can be easily entered into the big prize opening (for example, An advantageous big hit game state that opens the grand prize opening for a long period (20 seconds etc.) and a mode in which it is difficult to enter the big prize opening (for example, an extremely short period (0.2 seconds etc.)) And an unfavorable jackpot game state that opens a big prize opening, and based on the occurrence rate of each jackpot game state set in advance by the game designer, the presence or absence of a substantially high probability state (Easy to generate) was controlled. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the player recognizes whether or not a high-probability state has occurred (difficulty to occur) at a glance depending on whether or not the big winning opening is opened in an easy-to-enter manner in the big hit gaming state. There was a problem. For example, in an advantageous big hit game state, it is recognized that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a high probability state by opening the big prize opening in a manner that makes it easy to enter, and at that point the player feels at ease. May be given. In this case, the game ball launching operation for generating a ball to the grand prize opening and the V winning is a mere work, and the fun of the gaming machine that focuses attention on the behavior of the launched game ball is impaired. There was a risk of a decline in interest. Also, in an unfavorable big hit game state, it is recognized that the possibility of being controlled to a high probability state is low because the big prize opening is opened in a manner that makes it difficult to enter, and at that point it is unfortunate to the player It may give a feeling. Also in this case, there is a possibility that the willingness to play will be reduced, and there is a possibility that the gaming interest will be lowered. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, while having a conventional basic configuration that controls to a high probability state based on winning a V prize (equivalent to receiving a game ball in the second receiving port 2432), While the second big prize opening 2006 can be opened in a manner that makes it easy to enter the ball in each big hit gaming state (big hit gaming state A, big hit gaming state B, big hit gaming state C), In a special state (a state in which a game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432 to be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) and a non-special state (a game ball is received into the second receiving port 2432) Even if the big hit gaming state ends, it is difficult to determine a state that is not controlled to a high probability state. This makes it possible to control the presence / absence (difficulty of occurrence) of a high probability state based on the occurrence rate of each big hit gaming state set in advance by the game designer, but is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The player can be discouraged from the action of the big prize opening, giving the player the willingness to actively enter the game balls into the second big prize opening 2006 and the second receiving opening 2432 during each big hit gaming state. Continuing, it becomes possible to give the game machine original interest that allows attention to the behavior of the launched game ball entering the second grand prize opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest in the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present technical concept is a gaming machine capable of proceeding based on a game ball entering a start area provided in the game area, and is provided in the game area so that the game ball is difficult to enter. When a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and a variable pitching device that can be changed between a state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter, a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable pitching device can pass Specific game control means for controlling to a specific game state for opening and closing the variable pitching device, and based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area within a specific period during the specific game state, Profit giving means for giving a predetermined game profit after the completion of the game, and an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game, wherein the specific game control means operates the variable pitching device a plurality of times during the specific game state. Open and close Control so that the game ball can pass through the specific area during the first open state of the variable pitching device and during the second open state after the first number of times, Further, during the first open state, the non-specific period is different from the specific period, and during the second open state, the specific period is controlled. When the game ball passes through the specific area during the open state of the variable pitching device in the specific game state, the specific effect execution means includes a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect, and the specific effect execution unit includes the specific game state. When the game ball passes through the specific area during the first opening of the variable winning device in the first, a first specific effect that suggests that the specific gaming state is continued, The second number of times of the variable pitching device in a specific gaming state When the game ball in the open state has passed the specific area of, is characterized in performing a second specific effect suggests that the game benefit is imparted.

  According to the gaming machine described in the above technical idea, when a game ball won in the variable winning device in one specific gaming state passes through a specific area, a gaming profit different from the specific gaming state is given. It is possible to realize a special game characteristic that makes an illusion as if the specific gaming state continues. As a result, it is possible to add a new interesting feature that makes it possible to pay attention to "what game development will progress" when a game ball enters a specific area during a specific game state. It is possible to widen the range of game characteristics of gaming machines that allow game balls to enter, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine, or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined, Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component member 1100 Game panel 2000 Table unit 2005 First big prize opening 2006 Second big prize opening 2400 Attacker unit (variable pitching device)
2431 1st entrance 2432 2nd entrance (specific area)
2433 Sorting piece 2434 First receiving sensor 2435 Second receiving sensor (specific area)
3000 Back unit 3500 Back movable stage unit 3510 Back first decorative body unit (decorative body)
3511 1st left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3512 First right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3513 First fixed decorative lens (fixed decorative part)
3516 First lower arm 3518 First upper arm 3520 First opening / closing gear member 3521 First opening / closing arm 3523 First opening / closing spring (biasing member)
3524 First mounting base 3525 First mounting shaft member 3530 Back second decorative body unit (decorative body)
3531 Second left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3532 Second right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3533 Second fixed decorative lens (fixed decorative part)
3536 Second lower arm 3538 Second upper arm 3540 Second open / close gear member 3541 Second open / close arm 3543 Second open / close spring (biasing member)
3544 Second mounting base 3550 Back third decorative body unit (decorative body)
3551 Third left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3552 Third right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3553 Third fixed decorative lens (fixed decorative part)
3556 Third lower arm 3558 Third upper arm 3560 Third open / close gear member 3561 Third open / close arm 3563 Third open / close spring (biasing member)
3564 Third mounting base 3570 Back rotating base unit (base body)
3571 Back upper rotation base 3573 Second drive link gear member 3578 Third drive link gear member 3583 Action lever drive motor 3585 Action lever pinion gear 3586 Action lever (action body)
3586a Action lever rack gear 3586f First action part 3586i Second action part 3586k Third action part 3600 Back lifting unit 3610 Movable side unit 3611 Movable side base (appearance base)
3612 Backside Rotation Drive Motor 3614 Rotation Base Drive Gear 3650 Fixed Unit 3652 Lifting Rotator 3654 Backside Lifting Drive Motor

Claims (2)

A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is played is formed ;
A body frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame provided on the body frame so as to be openable and closable;
An upper plate for storing game media for playing games in the game area;
An operation device that can be operated by a player;
A lower plate which has a lower plate body for storing game media and is provided on the door frame and into which game media can flow from a predetermined supply port ;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame, which bulges forward under the game area in a front view, accommodates the operation device therein, and forms an accommodation space so that a game medium does not flow from the lower plate. When,
With
The lower plate body includes a first lower plate portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion ,
A cover portion for covering the front SL above the second lower tray section,
The cover portion is provided integrally with the lower plate body regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame, and constitutes a part of a member forming the accommodation space,
The cover part is attached to a cover attaching part formed outside the game medium storage area in the lower plate ,
Before Symbol supply port, a game machine, characterized by being provided offset in the second lower tray portion than the center of the lateral width of the lower dish. A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is played is formed ;
A body frame on which the game board is mounted;
A door frame provided on the body frame so as to be openable and closable;
An upper plate for storing game media for playing games in the game area;
An effect device that produces a predetermined effect,
A lower plate which has a lower plate body for storing game media and is provided on the door frame and into which game media can flow from a predetermined supply port ;
A bulging portion provided on the door frame, which bulges forward under the game area in a front view, accommodates the effect device therein, and forms an accommodation space so that a game medium does not flow from the lower plate. When,
With
The lower plate body includes a first lower plate portion in which a region facing the front of the gaming machine is formed, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion ,
A cover portion for covering the front SL above the second lower tray section,
The cover portion is provided integrally with the lower plate body regardless of the open / closed state of the door frame, and constitutes a part of a member forming the accommodation space,
The cover part is attached to a cover attaching part formed outside the game medium storage area in the lower plate ,
Before Symbol supply port, a game machine, characterized by being provided offset in the second lower tray portion than the center of the lateral width of the lower dish.

Images